TWI295792B - - Google Patents

Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI295792B
TWI295792B TW93123557A TW93123557A TWI295792B TW I295792 B TWI295792 B TW I295792B TW 93123557 A TW93123557 A TW 93123557A TW 93123557 A TW93123557 A TW 93123557A TW I295792 B TWI295792 B TW I295792B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
current
value
amount
image data
self
Prior art date
Application number
TW93123557A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW200506785A (en
Inventor
Tomoyuki Maeda
Original Assignee
Toshiba Matsushita Display Tec
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2003292600A external-priority patent/JP2005062485A/en
Priority claimed from JP2003359848A external-priority patent/JP2005122070A/en
Priority claimed from JP2003412928A external-priority patent/JP2005173193A/en
Priority claimed from JP2003432681A external-priority patent/JP2005189636A/en
Application filed by Toshiba Matsushita Display Tec filed Critical Toshiba Matsushita Display Tec
Publication of TW200506785A publication Critical patent/TW200506785A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI295792B publication Critical patent/TWI295792B/zh

Links

Description

1295792 九、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】1295792 IX. Description of the invention: [Technical field to which the invention belongs]

本發明係有關採用有機或無機電致發光(EL)元件之EI^M 不面板等自我發光顯示面板,而且有關此等顯示面板等之 驅動電路(ic) ’且有關EL顯示面板等之驅動方法及使用其 等之資訊顯示裝置等。 【先前技術】 般而σ,主動矩陣型顯示裝置係藉由矩陣狀排列多數 像素,按照所賦予之影像信號控料像素之光強度,以便 顯不圖像。例如:採用液晶作為電性光學物㈣,像素透 匕率係知,、、、寫人各像素之電壓而變化^採用有機電致發光 (=材料料電性光學轉換物f之主動矩陣型之圖像顯示 裝置之發光亮度係按照寫入像素之電流而變化。The present invention relates to a self-luminous display panel such as an EI^M non-panel using an organic or inorganic electroluminescence (EL) element, and a driving circuit (ic) relating to such display panels and the like, and a driving method relating to an EL display panel or the like And the use of such information display devices and the like. [Prior Art] As for the σ, the active matrix type display device arranges a plurality of pixels in a matrix to control the light intensity of the pixels in accordance with the given image signal so as to display an image. For example, liquid crystal is used as the electrical optical object (4), the pixel transmittance is known, and the voltage of each pixel is changed. ^ Organic electroluminescence is used (= active matrix type of material material optical optical converter f) The luminance of the image display device changes in accordance with the current written to the pixel.

攻曰曰颁不面板之各像素係作為快門而動作,藉由利用4 為快門之像素’開啟、關閉來自f光之光,讀顯示圖像 有機EL顯示面板為各像素具有發光元件之自發光型,I 古車乂 ;液日日顯不面板,有機EL顯示面板具有圖像視認十 同、不需要背光、應答速度快等優點。 有機扯顯示面板之各發光元件(像素)之亮度係由電流^ :::即與液晶顯示面板最大之不同點在於發光 電流驅動型或電流控制型。 _^示面板亦得以單純矩陣方式及主動矩陣方式構 Ϊ面I 造單純’然”大型且難以實現高精細之顯 丁 但價格低廉;後者可實現大型、高精細顯示面板, 94992-961016.doc 1295792 但具有控制方法在技術上困難、較昂貴等課題。現今頻繁 進行主動矩陣方式之開發。主動矩陣方式係藉由設置於像 素内部之薄膜電晶體(電晶體),控制流入設置於各像素之發 光元件之電流。 此主動矩陣方式之有機el顯示面板之像素16係由發光元 件之EL元件15、第一電晶體lla、第二電晶體Ub及儲存電 容19所組成。發光元件15為有機電致發光(EL)元件。於本 發明,供給(控制)電流給EL元件15之電晶體na稱為驅動用 電晶體11。 在許多情況,有機EL元件15由於具有整流性,因此稱為 OLED(有機發光二極體)。於圖1#,作為發光元㈣而採 用二極體記號。 然而,本發明之發光元件15並不限於〇LED,只要藉由流 入元件15之電机里控制免度者均可。例如:例示無機此元 件,其他還例示以半導體構成之白色發光二極體,並且例 示-般之發光二極體,另外,發光電晶體亦可。又,未必 要求毛光7L件1 5具有整流性,亦可為雙向性二極體,本發 明之EL元件15可為此任一。 元件壽命的原因有溫 有機EL具有所謂元件壽命的問題 度、電流ϊ專。又,由於始田士边 由於私用有機EL元件之顯示器係使用 電流發光,因此書面夕恭止曰 一曲之發先篁與流入裝置之電流量成比 例’故在發光量大之傻去 θ 像素 具有大篁的電流流入裝置而引 起元件劣化的問題,或為了、、六 乂馬了机入最大電流量而必須具有大 容量之電源等問題。 94992-961016.doc 1295792 【發明内容】 由於用於有機EL兀件之顯示器係晝面之發光量與流入裝 =之電流量處於比例關係’因此越提高元件之最大發光 2晝面所冑it件在最大發光量日寺之電流變得_大,而且 广制7〇件之最大發光量’晝面全體變暗。因此,本發明 知^晝面之顯示狀態,進行控制元件發光量之驅動。 第本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其係藉由 構成各像素之複數自我發光元件在像素行方向及像素列方 向配置成矩陣狀,將電流流入前述各自我發光元件之陽極 電極與陰極電極間,以便使前述各像素發光,用以驅動顯 示部;其包含: 第一處理’其係進行對應於自外部輸人之影像資料,取 得:流入前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之第一電流量, 且前述第-電流量不受限於前述影像資料周邊之影像資料 值分佈狀況,取得預先決定之單一值之處理者; 第二處理,其係進行對應於自外部輸入之前述影像資 料:設定應流人前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之第二電 流ΐ ’且前述第二電流量係按照前述影像資料周邊之前述 影,資料值分佈狀況,準備i個以特定比例抑制前述第一電 流量之值’且前述抑制比例可按照前述影像資料值分佈 況變化之處理者;及 根據前述第-或前述第二處理手段之結果,控制流入各 前述像素列之電流量’以便使前述顯示部發光。 如第-本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中第 94992-961016.doc 1295792 ^明係自外部輸人之前述影像資料之灰度值在比第一 ::疋灰度值位於為了進行黑顯示之低灰度侧時,藉由前述 第處理,決定施加於對應之前述各自我發光元件之前述 陽極,極與别述陰極電極間之前述第一電流量。 一士第本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中第 三^發明係自外部輸人之前述影像資料之灰度值在比第一 寺定火度值位於為了進行白顯示之高灰度侧時,藉由前述 ,二處理,決定施加於對應之前述各自我發光元件之前述 陽極電極與則述陰極電極間之前述第二電流量X,此時,對 於則述灰度值進行前述第_處理時之前述第—電流量為乂 時’於刖述第—電流量y與前述第二電流量X之間成立以下 關係: 〇.20y$ 〇·6〇” 如第一1第三之任一本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動 方法,其中第四本發明係前述施加電流量藉由取得在第一 期,自外部輸人之前述影像資料之最大值之電流值il,由 在第二期間輸人之前述影像資料,藉由運算求出適當之電 抓值12 ’根據比例l2/il,依序算出施加於根據在前述第二 ,間輸入之特定前述影像資料所顯示之前述各像素之電流 Ϊ之處理所決定。 如第-至第三之任一本發明之顯示裝置之驅動方法,其 :第五本發明係前述施加電流量藉由取得輸人之前述影像 Ί最大值之第二電流值l3 ’於前述各自我發光元件之 前述陽極電極及前述陰極電極間實際施加電流,求取最適 94992-961016.doc 1295792 人之述第二電流值i4 ’將比例i4/i3乘算於輸 像資㈣=貞料’以便依序算出施加於根據特定前述影 象貝科所顯示之前述各像素之電流量所決定。 方ΐ第:至第三之任一本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動 产信^中第:本發明係自外部輸入之前述影像資料之灰 -/弟―特定灰度值位於為了進行白顯示之高灰度側, ^黑=率控制施加於前述各自我發光元件之前述陽極電 虽與别述陰極電極間之電流量。 士第八本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中第 七本發明係前述黑插人由第—列依序進行至終端列',於i 巾貞内一次插入黑區域。 如第七本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,复中第 八本發明係前述黑插入由前述第一列依序進行至前述终端 列’於前述U貞内將前述黑區域分割成複數區域插入。 如第六本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中第 九本發明係前述黑插入不於丨幀内將黑區域分割成複數區 域插入’並由第-列至終端列為止依序進行,而是一面更 換順序一面插入。 如第-至第三之任一本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之 方法,其中第十本發明係自外部輸入之前述影像資料之灰 度值比第一特定灰度值位於為了進行白顯示之高灰度側, 施加於則述各自我發光元件之前述陽極電極與前述陰極電 極間之電流量係以調整流入源極線群之電流量而控制。 如第十本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中第 94992-961016.doc -9 · 1295792 十一本發明係流入前述诉;1¾始败 —1、, 引原極線群之前述電流量之前述調整 精由增減基準電流值而進行。 如第十本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中第 :二本發明係流人前述源極線群之前述電流量之前述調整 猎由增減灰度數而進行。 如弟-至第三之任—本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動 方法’其中第十三本發明係取得於第-_間流入前述各 自我發光7L件之前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之第一電 “人於刖述帛巾貞#間其次之第二幀期間流入之前述第二 電机之差分,運算使差分值為l/n(n為1以上之數差分電 流值γ由前述η差分電流值決定像素列之選擇值。 弟十一本&明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中 第十四本發明係如述η值為4 g η ^ 2 $ 6。 如第-至第三之任一本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動 方法/、中第十五本發明係藉由流入前述各自我發光元件 之前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之電流量,進行補正以 使r常數成為最適。 士第十五本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中 第十/、本發明係前述r常數為依序組合複數7曲線之中間 值所構成之曲線上之點集合。 如第十五本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中 第十七本發明係前述7常數之增減藉由前述自我發光元件 之發光期間之長短調整。 士第至第一之任一本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動 94992-961016.doc 1295792 方法/、中弟十八本發明係配置對於前述第二處理手段之 開關手段’控制前述第二處理之入切,以便於入時,以前 述第-處理及前述第二處理之組合,決定流人前述各自我 發光元件之前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之電流量,於 :時:僅以前述第一處理決定流入前述各自我發光元件之 前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之電流量。 第十九本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電路,其係藉 由構成各像素之複數自我發光元件在像素行方向及像素歹; 方向配置成矩陣狀,將電流流人前述各自我發光元件之陽 極電極與陰極電極間,以便使前述各像素發光,用以 顯示部;其具備: " 又八……β呢π曰外邵輸入之影像資料所 預先設定之第-亮度,使前述各自我發光元件發光者;及 第二發光手段,其係以同時參考周圍之前述各像素之潑 光亮度分佈’以抑韻應於自外部輸人之前述影像資料而 預先設定之前述第-亮度之方式所調整之第二亮度卜 述各自我發光元件發光者。 % 第二十本發明<自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電&,其係叫 由構成各像素之複數自我發光元件在像素行方向及像素错 方向配置成矩陣狀’將電流流人前述各自我發光元件Ί 極電極與陰極電極間,以便使前述各像素發光, 陽 顯示部;其具備: 料 第-處理手段,其係進行對應於自外部輸入之影像次 ,设定應流入前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之第一貝 電 94992-961016.doc -11 - 1295792 流量,且前述第—電流量不受限於前述影像資料周邊之影 像育料值分佈狀況,設定預先決定之單—值之處理者;/ —第二處理手段,其係進行對應於自外部輸入之前述影像 貧料’設定m前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之第二 電流量’且前述第二電流量係按照前述影像㈣周邊之前 :影,資料值分佈狀況’準備"固以特定比例抑制前述第一 電流量之值,且前述抑制比例可按照前述影像資料值 狀況變化之處理者;及 控制手段’其係根據前述第一及前述第二處理手段之結 果,控制流入各前述像素列之電流量者。 口 如第二十本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電路,盆中 第二十-本發明係前述第二處理電路根據自外部輸入之前 述影像資料,藉由運算處理,淮杆氺 处里進仃决疋各像素列之前述第 一電流量之處理。 如第-十-本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電路,其 中第二十二本發明之前述運算處理係取得在第_期間自^卜 部輸入之則述影像資料之最大值之電流值η,由在第二期 間輸入之前述影像資料,藉由運算求出適當之電流值丨/, 根據比例咖,依序算出施加於根據在前述第二期間輸入 之特定前述影像資料所顯示之前述各像素之電流量之處 理。 如第二十本發明之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電路,盆中 第二十三本發明係前述第二處理電路具有測^自外部輸入 之前述影像資料之手段,進行根據前述測定結果,決定各 94992-961016.doc -12- 1295792 像素列之前述第二電流量之運算處理。 如第—本一丄 . 一丁二本發明之自我發夹顯+继m "尤”、員不焱置之驅動電路,其 二=本發明之前料算處理料由取得 =:資料之最大值之第三電流值於前述各自我 ^ =之前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間實際施加電 最適值,將該值作為前述第:電流值M,將比例 1 諸依1?;"㈣料㈣,㈣«料前述影像 、 序4施加於顯示之前料像素之電流量之處理。 十九至第―十四之任一本發明之自我發光顯示裝置 :驅:路’其中第二十五本發明具備為了僅以前述第一 地:手段動作之對於前述第二處理手段之開關手段。 价、本心明之自我發光顯示裝置之控制器,其係呈 有第十九至第二十四之任―本發明之驅動電路。’、 1十七本毛明之自我發光顯示裝置,其係具有第十九 十四之任一本發明之驅動電路’且前述自我發光元 件h騎素^向及前述像素財向排列成矩陣狀。 第二十八本發明之自我發光顯示裝置,其係—種自我發 光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其係藉由構成各像素之複數自^ 發光7L件在像素行方向及像素列方向配置成矩陣狀,將電 流流入前述各自我發光元件之陽極電極與陰極電極間,以 便使前述各像素發光,用以驅動顯示部;且 根據第-或第:處理手段之結果,控制流人各前述像素 列之電流量,以便使前述顯示部發光;前述第一處理,係 進行對應於自外部輸人之影像資料,取得錢人前述陽極 94992-961016.doc -13 - 1295792 電極與前述陰極電極間之第一電流量,且前述第一電流量 不按照前述影像資料周邊之影像資料值分佈狀況,而取得 預先決定之單一值之處理者;前述第二處理,係進行對應 &自外部輸入之前述影像資料,取得應流入前述陽極電極 與w述陰極電極間之第二電流量,且前述第二電流量係按 照前述影像資料周邊之前述影像資料值分佈狀況,準備1 個以特定比例抑制前述第一電流量之值,且前述抑制比例 按照前述影像資料值分佈狀況可變之處理者;且 在將相當於進行白顯示之前述電流量以1 〇〇予以表現之 ^月况’對於前述特定電流量係以3 0以下予以表現的低電流 區域之灰度,若將N1>丨,N2> 0且N1.N2之正數設定為係 數,將前述特定電流量設定為w,將此時的電流值設定為Each pixel of the attack panel is operated as a shutter, and the light from the f light is turned on and off by using the pixel of 4 as the shutter, and the display image is read. The organic EL display panel has self-luminous light of each pixel. Type, I ancient car 乂; liquid day and day display panel, organic EL display panel has the advantages of image recognition, no backlight, fast response. The brightness of each of the light-emitting elements (pixels) of the organic display panel is different from that of the liquid crystal display panel by the current ^::, which is the light-emitting current-driven type or the current-controlled type. The _^ display panel can also be constructed by a simple matrix method and an active matrix method. It is simple and easy to achieve high-definition but low-cost; the latter can realize large-scale, high-definition display panels, 94992-961016.doc 1295792 However, there are problems in that the control method is technically difficult and expensive. Nowadays, the development of the active matrix method is frequently performed. The active matrix method is controlled by the thin film transistor (transistor) disposed inside the pixel, and is controlled to flow in each pixel. The current of the light-emitting element. The pixel 16 of the active matrix type organic EL display panel is composed of the EL element 15 of the light-emitting element, the first transistor 11a, the second transistor Ub, and the storage capacitor 19. The light-emitting element 15 is organic In the present invention, the transistor na for supplying (controlling) a current to the EL element 15 is referred to as a driving transistor 11. In many cases, the organic EL element 15 is called an OLED because of its rectibility. The organic light-emitting diode is a diode mark as the light-emitting element (4) in Fig. 1#. However, the light-emitting element 15 of the present invention is not limited to the germanium LED. It can be controlled by the motor flowing into the component 15. For example, an inorganic component is exemplified, and a white light-emitting diode composed of a semiconductor is exemplified, and a general-purpose light-emitting diode is exemplified. The transistor may also be required. Further, the hair 7L member 15 is not necessarily required to have rectifying property, and may be a bidirectional diode. The EL element 15 of the present invention may be used for any of the reasons. The problem of the life of the component, the current, and the current. Because the display of the private organic EL element is used for the illumination of the current organic EL element, the written eve of the song is proportional to the current flowing into the device. Therefore, in the case where the amount of illuminating is large, the θ pixel has a large current flowing into the device to cause deterioration of the element, or it is necessary to have a large-capacity power supply for the maximum current amount. 94992- 961016.doc 1295792 [Summary of the Invention] Since the amount of luminescence of the display system for the organic EL element is proportional to the amount of current flowing into the device, the maximum luminescence of the component is improved. In the case of the 发光 胄 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流 电流The driving method of the self-luminous display device of the present invention is a method in which a plurality of self-luminous elements constituting each pixel are arranged in a matrix in the pixel row direction and the pixel column direction, and current flows into the respective I. Between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the light-emitting element, so that each of the pixels emits light for driving the display portion; and the method includes: a first process of performing image data corresponding to the input from the outside, obtaining: flowing into the anode electrode and a first current amount between the cathode electrodes, wherein the first current amount is not limited to a distribution of image data values around the image data, and a predetermined single value is obtained; and the second processing corresponds to The image data input from the outside is set to set a second current ΐ ' between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode, and the second current amount is According to the foregoing image of the periphery of the image data, the distribution of the data values, preparing a processor that suppresses the value of the first current amount by a specific ratio and the suppression ratio may be changed according to the distribution of the image data values; and according to the foregoing Or as a result of the second processing means, controlling the amount of current flowing into each of the pixel columns to cause the display portion to emit light. For example, the driving method of the self-luminous display device of the present invention, wherein the gray value of the image data from the external input is located at a ratio of the first:: 疋 gray value is for the purpose of performing the method of driving the self-luminous display device of the present invention. When the black side is displayed on the low gradation side, the first current amount applied between the anode and the cathode electrode of the corresponding respective light-emitting elements is determined by the above-described first processing. The driving method of the self-luminous display device according to the invention, wherein the third embodiment of the invention is that the gray value of the image data from the external input is located at a higher gray level for the white display than the first temple fixed fire value. In the case of the side, the second current amount X applied between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode corresponding to the respective light-emitting elements is determined by the above-described two processes. When the first current amount is 乂, the following relationship is established between the current amount y and the second current amount X: 〇.20y$ 〇·6〇” as the first 1st third A driving method of the self-luminous display device of the present invention, wherein the fourth present invention is the current value il obtained by the maximum value of the image data input from the outside by the first application of the current amount The image data of the input during the second period is calculated by calculating an appropriate electric scratch value 12' according to the ratio l2/il, and sequentially calculating the foregoing for each of the specific image data input according to the second and the second input. Pixel The method of driving a display device according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein: the fifth invention is the second method of applying the current amount by obtaining a maximum value of the image Ί maximum value of the input image The current value l3' is actually applied between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the respective light-emitting elements, and the optimum current value of the current value i49' is calculated by multiplying the ratio i4/i3 by the optimum current 9492-961016.doc 1295792 The image (4) = 贞 ' 以便 以便 以便 以便 以便 以便 以便 以便 以便 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' Driving the production letter ^: The invention is based on the external input of the aforementioned image data gray-/di"-specific gray value is located on the high gray side for white display, ^ black = rate control applied to the aforementioned respective light-emitting elements The method of driving the self-luminous display device according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, wherein the seventh invention is performed by the first column to the terminal column. , In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the black insertion is performed by the first column to the terminal column in the foregoing U贞. The method for driving the self-luminous display device according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, wherein the ninth invention is that the black insertion is not divided into a plurality of regions and inserted into a plurality of regions. The method of the self-luminous display device of the present invention according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein the tenth invention is the external image input from the outside. The gray value of the data is located on the high gray side of the white display for the first specific gray value, and the current amount between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the respective light emitting elements is adjusted to adjust the inflow source line. The amount of current in the group is controlled. The driving method of the self-luminous display device according to the tenth invention, wherein the invention flows into the foregoing complaint; the first current amount of the first pole group is 1, 13 The aforementioned adjustment is performed by increasing or decreasing the reference current value. According to a tenth aspect of the present invention, in the driving method of the self-luminous display device, the second adjustment of the current amount of the source line group of the present invention is performed by increasing or decreasing the number of gradations. The driving method of the self-luminous display device of the present invention, wherein the thirteenth invention is obtained between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the respective I-lighting 7L member between the first and the third The first electric "the difference between the second motor flowing in during the second frame period between the second and the second" is calculated by the difference between the first motor and the second differential current value η (n is a differential current value γ of 1 or more by the foregoing The η differential current value determines the selected value of the pixel column. The driving method of the self-luminous display device of the eleventh embodiment, wherein the fourteenth invention is such that the η value is 4 g η ^ 2 $ 6. The driving method of the self-luminous display device of the present invention, wherein the fifteenth invention is corrected by the amount of current flowing between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the respective light-emitting elements. The fifteenth invention is a driving method of the self-luminous display device, wherein the tenth/the present invention is that the r constant is a set of points on a curve formed by sequentially combining the intermediate values of the complex seven curves. Fifteenth hair The driving method of the self-luminous display device according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, wherein the increase or decrease of the 7 constant is adjusted by the length of the light emitting period of the self-luminous element. The self-luminous display device of the present invention Driving method 94092-961016.doc 1295792 Method/Twenty-eighth invention is configured to control the cutting means of the second processing means to control the cutting of the second processing, so as to facilitate the entry, the aforementioned first processing and the foregoing a combination of the second process for determining a current amount between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of each of the light-emitting elements of the current source, wherein: the anode electrode flowing into the respective light-emitting elements is determined by the first process and the foregoing The amount of current between the cathode electrodes. The driving circuit of the self-luminous display device of the present invention is characterized in that a plurality of self-luminous elements constituting each pixel are arranged in a matrix in a pixel row direction and a pixel direction; Between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of each of the aforementioned light-emitting elements, so that the respective pixels emit light for display; Having: " another eight...β π 曰 邵 邵 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入 输入The distribution of the brightness of the pixel's brightness is determined by the second brightness adjusted by the above-mentioned first-brightness method set in advance from the image data of the external input. The invention relates to a driving electric device of a self-luminous display device, which is configured such that a plurality of self-luminous elements constituting each pixel are arranged in a matrix in a pixel row direction and a pixel misalignment direction, and current flows to the respective respective light-emitting elements of the present invention. And a cathode display portion for causing each of the pixels to emit light, and a positive display portion; wherein: the material first processing means is configured to correspond to an image input from the outside, and is set to flow between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode First Bayer 94992-961016.doc -11 - 1295792 flow, and the aforementioned first-current amount is not limited to the distribution of image nurturing values around the aforementioned image data, Setting a predetermined single-value processor; / - a second processing means for setting a second current amount between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode corresponding to the image poor material input from external input The second current amount is based on the front of the image (4) before: the shadow, the data value distribution condition 'preparation' is fixed at a specific ratio to suppress the value of the first current amount, and the suppression ratio can be changed according to the condition of the image data value. And a control means for controlling the amount of current flowing into each of the pixel columns based on the results of the first and second processing means. For example, the driving circuit of the self-luminous display device of the twentieth invention, the twentieth-the present invention is the second processing circuit, according to the image data input from the outside, by the arithmetic processing, The processing of the aforementioned first current amount in each pixel column is determined. The driving circuit of the self-luminous display device according to the tenth aspect of the present invention, wherein the arithmetic processing of the twenty-second invention obtains a current value η of a maximum value of the image data input from the portion during the _th period, Calculating an appropriate current value 丨/ by the operation of the image data input during the second period, and sequentially calculating, according to the proportional coffee, the aforementioned pixels applied to the specific image data input according to the second period input The processing of the amount of current. According to a driving circuit of the self-luminous display device of the twentieth invention, in the twenty-third aspect of the invention, the second processing circuit has means for measuring the image data input from the outside, and determining, according to the measurement result, 94992-961016.doc -12- 1295792 The arithmetic processing of the aforementioned second current amount of the pixel column. Such as the first - the first one. One Ding two of the invention's self-hairpin display + following the m " especially, the driver does not set the drive circuit, the second = the calculation of the material before the invention is obtained =: the largest data The third current value of the value is actually applied to the current optimum value between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode, and the value is taken as the first: current value M, and the ratio 1 is 1;; (4), (4) Processing of the above-mentioned image, sequence 4 applied to the amount of current of the material before the display. Nineteenth to fourteenth, the self-luminous display device of the present invention: drive: road 'the twenty-fifth The invention includes a switching means for the second processing means to operate only by the first means: the controller of the self-luminous display device of the present invention, which is the nineteenth to the twenty-fourthth The driving circuit of the present invention, wherein the self-luminous display device of the present invention has the driving circuit of the invention of the nineteenth aspect, and the self-luminous element h and the pixel The financial direction is arranged in a matrix. The self-luminous display device of the present invention is a driving method for a self-luminous display device, which is configured by a plurality of self-luminous 7L elements constituting each pixel arranged in a matrix in a pixel row direction and a pixel column direction, and a current is applied. Flowing between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the respective light-emitting elements to cause the respective pixels to emit light for driving the display portion; and controlling the amount of current flowing in each of the pixel columns according to the result of the first or the third processing means, The first processing is performed to obtain a first current amount between the electrode of the anode 94992-961016.doc -13 - 1295792 and the cathode electrode corresponding to the image data input from the outside. And the first current amount is not obtained according to the distribution of the image data values surrounding the image data, and the processor is configured to obtain a predetermined single value; and the second processing is performed by the corresponding image data corresponding to the external input. a second amount of current flowing between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode, and the second current amount is according to the image data The side of the image data value distribution state is prepared by a processor that suppresses the value of the first current amount by a specific ratio, and the suppression ratio is variable according to the distribution of the image data values; and is equivalent to performing white display. The current amount is expressed as 1 〇〇. For the gradation of the low current region in which the specific current amount is expressed by 30 or less, a positive number of N1 > 丨, N2 > 0 and N1.N2 is set. For the coefficient, set the aforementioned specific current amount to w, and set the current value at this time to

Iorg ’將發光期間設定為T〇rg,則取代前述電流量而施加滿 足電〃11值為Ι〇Γ§χΝ1且發光期間為Torgxl/N2之電流量。 【實施方式】 於本況明書,為了容易理解各圖式或/及容易製圖,有省 略或/及放大縮小之處。例如:於圖u所圖示之顯示面板之 剖面圖,將密封膜lu等充分變厚而圖示。另一方面,於圖 10’將密封蓋85變薄而圖示。又,亦有省略之處。例如·· 於,發明之顯示面板等雖省略為了防止不要光反射之相位 ^等C且適時附加。以上事項對於以下圖式亦同理。又, "扁諕或圮唬之處係具有同一或類似型態、材料、 機能或動作。 再者 即使未特別聲明 各圖式等所說明之内容可與其 94992-961016.doc •14- 1295792 他實施例等組合。例如:可於圖8之顯示面板附加觸控面板 等,作為圖34、圖52至圖Μ所圖示之資訊顯示裝置。又, 亦可安裝放大鏡342,構成用於攝影機(參考圖52等)等之觀 景器(參考圖34)。又,以圖4、圖15、圖18、圖21、圖幻等 所况明之本發明之驅動方法均可適用於任一本發明之顯示 裝置或顯示面板。總言之,本說明書所記載之驅動方法可 適用於本發明之顯示面板。又,本發明主要說明於各像素 形成電晶體之主動矩陣型顯示面板,但並不限定於此,當 然亦可適用於單純矩陣型。 如此’即使不於說明書中特別例示,說明書、圖式中所 記載或說明之事項、内容、樣式可互相組合而記載於請求 項,因為不可能以說明書等記述所有組合。 近年來,將複數有機電致發光(EL)元件排列成矩陣狀而 構成之有機EL顯示面板係作為低耗電且高顯示品質,並且 可薄型化之顯示面板而受到注目。 如圖10所示,有機EL顯示面板係於形成有作為像素電極 之透明電極105之玻璃板71(陣列基板)上,層疊電子輸送 層、發光層、電洞輸送層等所組成之至少1層之有機機能層 (EL層)15及金屬電極(反射膜)(陰極)1〇6。 將正電壓施加於透明電極(像素電極)1 〇5之陽極 (Anode),將負電壓施加於金屬電極(反射電極)106之陰極 (Cathode),亦即,藉由將直流施加於透明電極1〇5及金屬電 極106間,有機機能層(EL層)15發光。藉由將可期待良好發 光特性之有機化合物使用於有機機能層,EL顯示面板將可 94992-961016.doc -15- 1295792 耐於實用。再者,本發明係以有機EL顯示面板為例說明, 但並不限定於此,可適應於使用無機EL之顯示器,或利用 FED或SED等自發光元件之顯示器。又,構造、電路等,亦 有可適用於TN液晶顯示面板、STN液晶顯示面板等其他顯 示面板之事項。 以下’詳細說明本發明之EL顯示面板之製造方法及構 造。首先,於陣列基板71形成驅動像素之電晶體u,1個像 素係以2個以上,更好以4個或5個電晶體構成。又,將像素 電流程式化,程式化之電流供給至EL元件15。通常,電流 籲 程式化之值係作為電壓值而由儲存電容19保持。關於此電 曰曰體11之組合等之像素構成待後述。其次,於電晶體11形 成作為電洞注入電極之像素電極,像素電極1〇5係藉由光微 影而圖案化。再者,於電晶體u之下層或者上層形成或配 置遮光膜,用以防止光入射於電晶體丨丨所發生之光導電現 象(Photoconduct)所造成之晝質劣化。 再者’所谓電流程式,其係由源極驅動器電路丨4,將程 式電流施加於像素(或者從像素吸收至源極驅動器電路 _ M),使像素保持相當於此電流之信號值。將對應於此保持 之佗號值之電流流入EL元件15(或者*EL元件15流入)。總 言之,以電流程式化,將相當於(對應於)程式化之電流之電 流流入EL元件15。 另方面’所謂電壓程式,其係由源極驅動器電路14, 將耘式電壓施加於像素,使像素保持相當於此電壓之信號 值。將對應於此保持之電壓之電流流、EL元件15。總言之, 94992-961016.doc -16 - !295792 以電壓程式化,在像素内將電壓轉換成電流值,將相當於 (對應於)程式化之電壓之電流流入EL元件15。 百先’用於有機EL顯示面板之主動矩陣方式必須滿足以 下2個條件。K選擇㈣像素,賦予必要之顯示資訊。2.可 歷經1幀期間,將電流流入EL元件。 為了滿足這2個條件,於圖76所示之以往之有機EL像素構 第-電晶體m係作為用以選擇像素之開關用電晶體, 弟二電晶體1 la係作為用以將電流供給EL元件(el膜口5之 驅動用電晶體。 Λ 在此,若與用於液晶之主動矩陣方式比較,液晶用亦需 要開關用電晶體m ’但為了使^件15亮燈,需要驅動用 電晶體11 a。此理由在於,液晶夕4卜主 # 你、欣日日之h況可藉由施加電壓而保 持開啟狀態,但EL元件1 5之情況芸尤姓綠* 、 h,凡右不持續流入電流,將無 法維持像素16之亮燈狀態。 因此,於EL顯示面板,為了持蟢、、古 θ 1符續流入電流,必須使電晶 體11 a持續開啟。首先,若掃抵綠 部描線、資料線雙方均開啟時, 電何經由開關用電晶體11 b而儲存於雷交 丨句甘%电谷态19。此電容器i 9 持續將電壓施加於驅動用電晶體lla之閘極,因此即使開關 用電晶體m關閉,電流仍持續由電流供給線(福)流入, 可歷經1幀期間開啟像素16。 必須施加按照灰度之電壓,以 極電壓。故,驅動用電晶體lla 作 採用此構成顯示灰度時 為驅動用電晶體lla之閘 之開啟電流之變動將直接表現於顯$ 若是以單結晶形成之電晶體 電晶體之開啟電流極為均 94992-961016.doc 1295792 勻,但若是可形成於廉價之玻璃基板、形成溫度在450度以 下之低溫多晶矽技術所形成之低溫多晶電晶體,其臨限值 之變動在±0.2 V〜0·5 V的範圍内有變動。因此,流過驅動用 電晶體11a之開啟電流係對應於此而變動,產生顯示不均。 此等不均不僅發生於臨限電壓之變動,亦發生於電晶體之 遷移率、閘極絕緣膜之厚度等。又,由於電晶體丨丨之劣化, 特性亦變化。 再者,不限定於低溫多晶矽技術,亦可採用製程溫度45〇 度(攝氏)以上之高溫多晶矽技術而構成,而且亦可採用以固 相(CGS)沈積之半導體膜形成TFT等者。此外,亦可採用有 機 TFT 〇 ,採用非晶矽技術形成之TFT陣列構成面板。再者, 本況明書主要說明以低溫多晶矽形成之TFT,但發生πτ之 變動等課題在其他方式亦同。 因此,於類比式顯示灰度之方法,為了獲得均句的顯示, 必須嚴密控制裝置之特性,現狀之低溫多晶石夕電晶體無法 :馬足將此變動抑制在特定範圍内之樣式。為了解決此問 喊’思考出在1像素内設置4個以上之電晶體,藉由電容器 彌補臨限值電厘之變動,以獲得均勾電流之方法,或於每\ 像素形成穩流電路,以謀求電流均勻化之方法等。 然而,此等方法由於程式化之電流經由肛元件15 =因此於電流路徑變化時’對於連接於電源線之開關電 : 動電流之電晶體成為源極隨福器,驅動邊限變 乍,故具有驅動電壓變高的課題。 94992-961016.doc -18 - 1295792 又’必須在阻抗低的區域使用連接於電源之開關電晶 體’亦具有此動作範圍受到EL元件15之特性變動影響之課 題。除此之外,在飽和區域之電壓電流特性,發生扭結電 ML之Μ況或電晶體之臨限電壓發生變動之情況,亦具有 記憶之電流值變動的課題。 針對上述課題,本發明之EL元件構造係控制流入EL元件 15之電流之電晶體丨丨不成為源極隨耦器,且即使於該電晶 體有扭結電流,仍可將扭結電流之影響抑制在最小,減少 記憶之電流值之變動之構成。 具體如圖1所示,本發明之EL顯示裝置之像素構造係藉由 最少由4個單位像素所組成之複數電晶體丨丨及EL元件所形 成再者像素電極與源極信號線重疊而構成。總言之, 於源極#號線丨8上,形成絕緣膜或丙烯酸材料所組成之平 坦化膜而絕緣,於此絕緣膜上行成像素電極1〇5。如此於源 極信號線18上重疊像素電極之構成稱為高開口率(HA)構 造。 藉由使閘極信號線(第一掃描線)17a作動(施加開啟電 壓),經由ELtc件15驅動用之電晶體(電晶體或開關元件)Ua 及電曰曰體(電晶體或開關元件)i丨c,自源極驅動器電路丨4流 出應流入前述EL元件15之電流值。又,為了使電晶體Ua 之閘極與汲極間短路,電晶體llb係藉由閘極信號線17a成 為作動(施加開啟電壓)而開啟,同時於連接於電晶體Ua之 閑極與汲極間之電容器(電容器(Capacit〇r)、儲存電容、附 加電容)19,記憶電晶體lla之閘極電壓(或汲極電壓),以便 94992-96l0l6.doc -19- 1295792 使前述電流值流入(參考圖3(a))。 再者’電晶體11a之源極(s)-閘極(G)間電容(電容器)19宜 在Ο·2 pF以上之電容。做為其他構成亦另外例示形成電容器 19之構成。總言之,由電容器電極層、閘極絕緣膜及閘極 金屬形成儲存電容之構成。由防止電晶體llc之漏電所造成 之焭度下降之觀點、為了使顯示動作安定之觀點來看,宜 如此另外構成電容器。再者,電容器(儲存電容)i 9之大小宜 在〇·2 PF以上、2 PF以下,其中電容器(儲存電容)19之大小 尤宜在0.4 pF以上、ι·2 pF以下。 再者,電容器19宜大致形成於鄰接像素間之非顯示區 域,一般而言,做成彩色有機E]L15時,由於以利用金屬掩 模之掩模蒸鑛形成有機EL層1 5,因此由於掩模位置偏差, 發生EL層之形成位置偏差。若發生位置偏差,唯恐各色有 機EL層15(15R、15G、15B)會重疊。因此,各色之鄰接像 素間之非顯示區域必須離開! 〇 μ m以上。此部分將成為無助 於發光的部分。目此,於此區域形成儲存電容19,係成為 用以提升開口率之有效手段。 再者’金屬掩模係以磁體製作,由基板71之背面,以磁 鐵利用磁力吸附金屬掩模。藉由磁力,金屬掩模將無縫隙 地與基板密接。關於以上製造方法之事項,亦適用於本發 明之其他製造方法。 …其次,使閘極信號線17a非作動(施加關閉電壓),使閘極 七5虎線1 7b作動’將電流之流動路徑切換成包含連接於前述 第一電晶體11a及EL元件15之電晶體nd,以及前述肛元件 94992-96l016.doc -20- 1295792 15之路徑,使記憶之電流流入前述el元件i5而動作(參考圖 3(b))。 " 此電路係於1像素内具有4個電晶體11,電晶體Ua之閘極 連接於電a曰體11b之源極。又,電晶體llb及電晶體之閘 極連接於閘極信號線17a。電晶體1 lb之汲極連接於電晶體 11c之源極及電晶體Ud之源極,電晶體iic之汲極連接於源 極k號線18。電晶體lld之閘極連接於閘極信號線,電 晶體lid之汲極連接於EL元件15之陽極電極。 再者,於圖1,所有的電晶體均以p通道構成。相較於N 通道之電曰曰體,p通道之遷移率多少較低,但由於耐壓大或 不易發生劣化,因此較適宜。但本發明並非將£]^元件構成 僅限定在以P通道構成,僅以N通道構成亦可,而且亦可採 用N通道及p通道雙方構成。 再者於圖1 ’電晶體11c、lib係以同一極性構成,且以 N通道構成,電晶體丨^、nd宜以p通道構成。一般而言, 相較於N通道電晶體,p通道電晶體具有可靠度高、扭結電 乂專特長’對於藉由控制電流以獲得目的之發光強度之 EL元件15,電晶體lla為p通道的效果較大。最適合的是以p 通道形成所有構成像素之TFT11,内建閘極驅動器12亦宜以 P通道形成。藉由如此僅以p通道之叮丁形成陣列,掩模片 數成為5片,可實現低成本化、高良率化。 以下’為了進一步使本發明容易理解,採用圖3說明本發 明之EL元件構成。本發明之el元件構成係藉由2個時序控 制。第一時序為記憶必要之電流值之時序,於此時序,藉 94992-961016.doc -21 - 1295792 由開啟電日日體llb及電晶體Ue,作為等價電路,成為圖 ()在此,藉由信號線,寫入特定電流Iw。藉此,電晶體 。成為閘極與及極連接之狀態,電流經由此電晶體11 a 及電晶體11c流入。故,電晶體lu之閘極源極之電壓係成 為流入11之電壓V1。 第一時序為電晶體Ua及電晶體llc關閉,電晶體lld開啟 之時序,當時之等價電路成為圖3(b),並原樣保持電晶體lla 之源極閘極間電壓。此情況,由於電晶體11 &經常於飽和 區域動作,因此Iw之電流一定。 右如此動作,將如圖5所圖示。總言之,圖50)之5i a係表 示顯示畫面50之某時刻之受到電流程式化之像素(列)(寫入 像素列)。如圖5(b)所示,此像素(列)5U為非亮燈(非顯示像 素(列)),其他像素(列)為顯示像素(列)53(電流流入非像素 53之EL元件15,EL元件15發光)。 如圖3(a)所示,於圖丨之像素構成之情況,電流程式時, 程式電流Iw流入源極信號線18,此電流^流過電晶體na, =電容器19進行電壓設定(程式),以便保持流入lw之電 流。此時,電晶體1 id處於開啟狀態(關閉狀態)。 人’如圖3(b)所示’電流流入el元件15之期間,電晶 體11 c電曰曰體11 b關閉,電晶體11 d動作。總言之,關閉電 壓(Vgh)施加於閘極信號線17a,電晶體llb、Uc關閉。另 方面,開啟電壓(Vgi)施加於閘極信號線17b,電晶體lld 開啟。 此時序表圖示於圖4。再者,於圖4等,括弧内之加字(例 94992-961016.doc -22- 1295792 如’(1)等)係表示像素列之編號。總言之,閘極信號線HaQ) 表不像素列(1)之閘極信號線17a,而且圖4上段之* H表示 水平掃描期間。總言之,1H為第一個水平掃描期間。再者, 以上事項係為了易於說明,並非限定(編號1H、1H週期、像 素列編號之順序等)。 如以圖4可知,於各選擇之像素列(選擇期間為ih),當開 啟電壓施加於閘極信號線17a時,關閉電壓施加於閘極信號 線17b。又,此期間電流並未流元件15(非亮燈狀態)。 於未選擇之像素列,關閉電壓施加於閘極信號線17a,開啟 電壓施加於閘極信號線17b,而且此期間電流流入EL元件 1 5 (亮燈狀態)。 再者,晶體11 b之閘極及電晶體11 c之閘極連接於同一 閘極信號線17a,但電晶體Ub之閘極及電晶體Uc之閘極亦 可連接於不同之閘極信號線17。1像素之閘極信號線為3條 (圖1之構成為2條)。藉由個別控制電晶體Ub之閘極之開啟/ 關閉時序及電晶體i lc之閘極之開啟/關閉時序,可進一步 降低電晶體11a之變動所造成2EL元件15之電流值變動。 將閘極#號線17a及閘極信號線17b共同化,製成電晶體 11c及lid不同之導電型(N通道及p通道),則可達成驅動電 路之簡化,並且提升像素之開口率。 右如此構成,作為本發明之動作時序,來自信號線之寫 入路徑關閉。亦即,記憶特定電流之際,若電流之流動路 徑有分支’正確的電流值不會記憶於電晶體lla之源極(s)_ 閑極(G)間電容(電容器)。藉由製成電晶體ilc及電晶體lld 94992-961016.doc 23 1295792 不同之導電型, 之切換之時序, lid。 ’以便控制互相之臨限值,從而可在掃描線 ,一定將電晶體1 lc關閉後,才開啟電晶體 本專利之發明目的在於提案一種電晶體特性之變動不影 響顯示之電路構成,因此需要4電晶體以上。根據此等電晶 體特性決定電路常數時,若4個電晶體之特性不一致,難以 求得適當之電路常數。對於雷射照射之長軸方向,通道方 向為水平之情況及垂直之情況,電晶體特性之臨限值及遷 移率係相異而形成。再者,任一情況之變動程度均相同。 於水平方向及垂直方向,遷移率、臨限值之值之平均值不 同’因此構成像素之所有電晶體之通道方向宜相同。 於圖27,設定流入EL元件15之電流時,流入電晶體271a 之信號電流為Iw,其結果,於電晶體271a所產生之閘極·源 極間電壓為Vgs。寫入時,藉由電晶體llc,電晶體271a之 閘極•汲極間短路’因此電晶體2 71 a在飽和區域動作,故 以以下算式賦予Iw。 (式1)When Iorg ' is set to T 〇 rg, the amount of current that satisfies the electric power 11 value Ι〇Γ§ χΝ 1 and the illuminating period is Torgxl / N2 is applied instead of the aforementioned current amount. [Embodiment] In the present specification, in order to facilitate understanding of each drawing or/and easy drawing, there is a need to omit or/and zoom in and out. For example, in the cross-sectional view of the display panel illustrated in Fig. u, the sealing film lu or the like is sufficiently thickened and shown. On the other hand, the sealing cover 85 is thinned as shown in Fig. 10'. Also, there are some omissions. For example, the display panel or the like of the invention is omitted in order to prevent phase C such as unnecessary light reflection. The above matters are also the same for the following figures. Also, " squatting or squatting has the same or similar type, material, function or action. Furthermore, the contents described in the drawings and the like may be combined with other embodiments such as 94992-961016.doc • 14-1295792, even if it is not specifically stated. For example, a touch panel or the like can be attached to the display panel of Fig. 8 as the information display device shown in Figs. 34 and 52 to Μ. Further, a magnifying glass 342 may be attached to constitute a viewfinder (refer to Fig. 34) for use in a camera (refer to Fig. 52, etc.). Further, the driving method of the present invention as described in Fig. 4, Fig. 15, Fig. 18, Fig. 21, Fig. 21, and the like can be applied to any of the display devices or display panels of the present invention. In summary, the driving method described in the present specification can be applied to the display panel of the present invention. Further, the present invention is mainly applied to an active matrix display panel in which a transistor is formed in each pixel. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and it is also applicable to a simple matrix type. In this case, the items, contents, and styles described or illustrated in the drawings and drawings may be combined with each other and described in the request, and it is not possible to describe all the combinations in the specification or the like. In recent years, an organic EL display panel in which a plurality of organic electroluminescence (EL) elements are arranged in a matrix has been attracting attention as a display panel which is low in power consumption and high in display quality and which can be made thinner. As shown in FIG. 10, the organic EL display panel is formed on a glass plate 71 (array substrate) on which a transparent electrode 105 as a pixel electrode is formed, and at least one layer composed of an electron transport layer, a light-emitting layer, a hole transport layer, and the like is laminated. The organic functional layer (EL layer) 15 and the metal electrode (reflective film) (cathode) 1〇6. A positive voltage is applied to the anode (Anode) of the transparent electrode (pixel electrode) 1 〇 5, and a negative voltage is applied to the cathode of the metal electrode (reflecting electrode) 106, that is, by applying a direct current to the transparent electrode 1 Between the 〇5 and the metal electrode 106, the organic functional layer (EL layer) 15 emits light. By using an organic compound which can expect good luminescence characteristics for an organic functional layer, the EL display panel can be practically used in the manner of 94992-961016.doc -15-1295792. Further, the present invention is described by taking an organic EL display panel as an example. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and can be applied to a display using an inorganic EL or a display using a self-luminous element such as FED or SED. Further, the structure, the circuit, and the like are also applicable to other display panels such as a TN liquid crystal display panel and an STN liquid crystal display panel. Hereinafter, the manufacturing method and structure of the EL display panel of the present invention will be described in detail. First, a transistor u for driving a pixel is formed on the array substrate 71, and one pixel is composed of two or more, more preferably four or five transistors. Further, the pixel current is programmed, and the programmed current is supplied to the EL element 15. Typically, the current programmed value is held as a voltage value by the storage capacitor 19. The pixel configuration of the combination of the electrodes 11 and the like will be described later. Next, a pixel electrode as a hole injecting electrode is formed in the transistor 11, and the pixel electrode 1〇5 is patterned by photolithography. Further, a light-shielding film is formed or disposed on the lower layer or the upper layer of the transistor u to prevent deterioration of the enamel caused by the photoconductance of the light incident on the transistor. Further, the so-called current program is applied from the source driver circuit 丨4 to the pixel (or from the pixel to the source driver circuit _M) so that the pixel maintains a signal value corresponding to the current. A current corresponding to the value of the apostrophe held therein flows into the EL element 15 (or the *EL element 15 flows in). In summary, the current is stylized, and a current equivalent to (corresponds to) the stylized current flows into the EL element 15. Another aspect is a voltage program in which a source driver circuit 14 applies a 耘 voltage to a pixel to maintain a pixel value corresponding to the voltage. A current flow corresponding to the voltage held thereby, the EL element 15. In summary, 94992-961016.doc -16 - !295792 is programmed with voltage to convert the voltage into a current value in the pixel, and a current equivalent to (corresponding to) the stylized voltage flows into the EL element 15. The active matrix method used in the organic EL display panel must meet the following two conditions. K selects (four) pixels to give the necessary display information. 2. Current can flow into the EL element during one frame period. In order to satisfy these two conditions, the conventional organic EL pixel structure-the transistor m shown in FIG. 76 is used as a switching transistor for selecting a pixel, and the second transistor 1 la is used to supply a current to the EL. The element (the transistor for driving the el film opening 5) Λ In this case, if the liquid crystal is used in comparison with the active matrix method for liquid crystal, the switching transistor m' is required for the liquid crystal, but in order to turn on the device 15, it is necessary to drive the electric power. Crystal 11 a. The reason is that the liquid crystal eve 4 Bu main # you, Xin Rizhi can be kept open by applying a voltage, but the EL element 15 is in the case of green *, h, where right Continuously flowing current will not be able to maintain the lighting state of the pixel 16. Therefore, in order to continue the current flow in the EL display panel, the transistor 11a must be continuously turned on. First, if it is scanned against the green part. When both the trace line and the data line are turned on, the electricity is stored in the Leijiao Gandian Valley state via the switch transistor 11b. The capacitor i9 continuously applies a voltage to the gate of the drive transistor 11a. Therefore, even if the switching transistor m is turned off, the current is still Continued to flow in from the current supply line, the pixel 16 can be turned on during one frame period. The voltage according to the gradation must be applied to the extreme voltage. Therefore, when the driving transistor 11a is used to display the gradation, the driving power is used. The change of the on-current of the gate of the crystal 11a will be directly expressed in the display. If the transistor crystal is formed by a single crystal, the on-current of the transistor is extremely uniform, but it can be formed on an inexpensive glass substrate to form a temperature. The low temperature polycrystalline transistor formed by the low temperature polysilicon technology of 450 degrees or less has a variation in the threshold value within a range of ±0.2 V to 0.5 V. Therefore, the opening current flowing through the driving transistor 11a This varies depending on this, and display unevenness occurs. These unevenness occur not only in the fluctuation of the threshold voltage but also in the mobility of the transistor, the thickness of the gate insulating film, etc. Deterioration, characteristics also change. Furthermore, it is not limited to low-temperature polysilicon technology, and can also be constructed by high-temperature polysilicon technology with a process temperature of 45 ( (Celsius) or higher. A semiconductor film deposited by a solid phase (CGS) forms a TFT, etc. Further, an organic TFT 〇 can be used, and a TFT array formed by an amorphous germanium technique can be used to form a panel. Further, the present specification mainly describes a TFT formed by low-temperature polysilicon, but The problem of the occurrence of the change of πτ is the same in other ways. Therefore, in the analogy method of displaying the gradation, in order to obtain the display of the uniform sentence, the characteristics of the device must be strictly controlled, and the current low-temperature polycrystalline crystal can not be: In order to solve this problem, the method of "suggesting the variation of the threshold voltage by a capacitor to obtain a uniform hook current" is considered by thinking of setting up four or more transistors in one pixel. Or a method of forming a steady current circuit every \ pixels to achieve current uniformity. However, these methods are due to the stylized current passing through the anal element 15 = therefore when the current path changes 'for the switch connected to the power line: the transistor of the moving current becomes the source with the fuse, the driving margin becomes 乍, so There is a problem that the driving voltage becomes high. 94992-961016.doc -18 - 1295792 Further, it is necessary to use a switching transistor connected to a power supply in a region where impedance is low, and this operation range is affected by variations in characteristics of the EL element 15. In addition, the voltage-current characteristics in the saturation region have a problem of fluctuations in the current value of the memory when the kink ML occurs or the threshold voltage of the transistor fluctuates. In view of the above problems, the EL element structure of the present invention controls the transistor of the current flowing into the EL element 15 not to become a source follower, and even if the transistor has a kink current, the influence of the kink current can be suppressed. The smallest, reducing the composition of the change in the current value of the memory. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1 , the pixel structure of the EL display device of the present invention is formed by overlapping a plurality of transistor electrodes and EL elements composed of at least four unit pixels, and further forming a pixel electrode and a source signal line. . In summary, on the source #线线线8, a flattening film composed of an insulating film or an acrylic material is formed and insulated, and the insulating film is formed as a pixel electrode 1〇5. The configuration in which the pixel electrodes are superimposed on the source signal line 18 is referred to as a high aperture ratio (HA) configuration. By driving the gate signal line (first scanning line) 17a (applying an on voltage), the transistor (transistor or switching element) Ua and the electrode (transistor or switching element) for driving via the ELtc device 15 are driven. i丨c, the current value flowing into the EL element 15 from the source driver circuit 丨4. Further, in order to short-circuit the gate and the drain of the transistor Ua, the transistor 11b is turned on by the gate signal line 17a (applying an on-voltage), and is connected to the idler and the drain of the transistor Ua. Capacitor (capacitor, storage capacitor, additional capacitor) 19, the gate voltage (or drain voltage) of the memory transistor 11a, so that the aforementioned current value flows into the 94092-96l0l6.doc -19-1295792 ( Refer to Figure 3(a)). Further, the capacitance (capacitor) 19 between the source (s) and the gate (G) of the transistor 11a is preferably a capacitance of Ο·2 pF or more. The configuration of forming the capacitor 19 is also exemplified as another configuration. In summary, the capacitor electrode layer, the gate insulating film, and the gate metal form a storage capacitor. From the viewpoint of preventing the decrease in the degree of turbulence caused by the leakage of the transistor llc, and in order to stabilize the display operation, it is preferable to form the capacitor as such. Further, the size of the capacitor (storage capacitor) i 9 is preferably 〇·2 PF or more and 2 PF or less, and the size of the capacitor (storage capacitor) 19 is preferably 0.4 pF or more and ι·2 pF or less. Further, the capacitor 19 is preferably formed substantially in a non-display area between adjacent pixels. Generally, when the color organic E] L15 is formed, since the organic EL layer 15 is formed by vapor deposition using a mask of a metal mask, The positional deviation of the mask occurs, and the positional deviation of the formation of the EL layer occurs. If a positional deviation occurs, it is feared that the organic EL layers 15 (15R, 15G, 15B) of the respective colors overlap. Therefore, the non-display area between adjacent pixels of each color must leave! 〇 μ m or more. This part will become a part that does not help to shine. Therefore, the formation of the storage capacitor 19 in this region is an effective means for increasing the aperture ratio. Further, the metal mask is made of a magnet, and the metal mask is magnetically attracted by the magnetic force from the back surface of the substrate 71. The metal mask is seamlessly bonded to the substrate by magnetic force. The matters relating to the above manufacturing methods are also applicable to other manufacturing methods of the present invention. ... secondly, the gate signal line 17a is deactivated (applying a turn-off voltage), and the gate 7 5 tiger line 17b is actuated to switch the flow path of the current to include the electricity connected to the first transistor 11a and the EL element 15. The crystal nd, and the path of the aforementioned anal element 94092-96l016.doc -20-1295792 15, causes the memory current to flow into the aforementioned el element i5 (see Fig. 3(b)). " This circuit has four transistors 11 in one pixel, and the gate of the transistor Ua is connected to the source of the electric a body 11b. Further, the transistor 11b and the gate of the transistor are connected to the gate signal line 17a. The drain of 1 lb of the transistor is connected to the source of the transistor 11c and the source of the transistor Ud, and the drain of the transistor iic is connected to the source k line 18. The gate of the transistor 11d is connected to the gate signal line, and the drain of the transistor lid is connected to the anode electrode of the EL element 15. Furthermore, in Figure 1, all of the transistors are constructed of p-channels. The mobility of the p-channel is somewhat lower than that of the N-channel electro-thoracic body, but it is suitable because it has a large withstand voltage or is less prone to deterioration. However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the P-channel, but may be constituted by only the N-channel, and may be composed of both the N-channel and the p-channel. Further, in Fig. 1, the transistors 11c and lib are formed of the same polarity and are formed of N channels, and the transistors φ and nd are preferably constituted by p channels. In general, a p-channel transistor has a high reliability and a kink-electrode characteristic compared to an N-channel transistor. For an EL element 15 that controls the current to obtain a desired luminous intensity, the transistor 11a is a p-channel. The effect is greater. It is most suitable to form all of the TFTs 11 constituting the pixels by the p-channel, and the built-in gate driver 12 is also preferably formed by the P-channel. By forming the array in only the p-channel, the number of masks is five, and the cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved. Hereinafter, in order to further facilitate the understanding of the present invention, the EL element configuration of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The el element configuration of the present invention is controlled by two timings. The first timing is the timing of the necessary current value for memory. At this timing, by using the 94921-961016.doc -21 - 1295792, the electric celestial body llb and the transistor Ue are turned on as the equivalent circuit, and the figure () is here. The specific current Iw is written by the signal line. Thereby, the transistor. When the gate is connected to the gate, current flows in through the transistor 11a and the transistor 11c. Therefore, the voltage of the gate source of the transistor lu is the voltage V1 flowing into the voltage 11. The first timing is the timing at which the transistor Ua and the transistor llc are turned off, and the transistor 11d is turned on. At that time, the equivalent circuit becomes Fig. 3(b), and the voltage between the source gates of the transistor 11a is maintained as it is. In this case, since the transistors 11 & often operate in a saturated region, the current of Iw is constant. The right action is as shown in Figure 5. In summary, 5i a of Fig. 50) indicates a pixel (column) (written pixel column) that is subjected to current programming at a certain time on the display screen 50. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the pixel (column) 5U is a non-lighting (non-display pixel (column)), and the other pixels (columns) are display pixels (columns) 53 (current flows into the EL element 15 of the non-pixel 53). , EL element 15 emits light). As shown in Fig. 3(a), in the case of the pixel configuration of the figure, in the current program, the program current Iw flows into the source signal line 18, and the current flows through the transistor na, and the capacitor 19 performs voltage setting (program). In order to keep the current flowing into lw. At this time, the transistor 1 id is in an on state (off state). When the current flows into the el element 15 as shown in Fig. 3(b), the electromorph 11c is turned off, and the transistor 11d operates. In summary, the off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17a, and the transistors 11b, Uc are turned off. On the other hand, the turn-on voltage (Vgi) is applied to the gate signal line 17b, and the transistor 11d is turned on. This timing chart is shown in Figure 4. Furthermore, in Fig. 4 and the like, the characters in the brackets (for example, 94992-961016.doc -22-1295792, such as '(1), etc.) indicate the number of the pixel columns. In summary, the gate signal line HaQ) represents the gate signal line 17a of the pixel column (1), and * H of the upper portion of Fig. 4 indicates the horizontal scanning period. In summary, 1H is the first horizontal scanning period. Furthermore, the above matters are not limited as long as they are easy to explain (number 1H, 1H cycle, order of pixel column numbers, etc.). As can be seen from Fig. 4, in each of the selected pixel columns (ih in the selection period), when the turning-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17a, the turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17b. Also, during this period, the current does not flow through the element 15 (non-lighting state). In the unselected pixel column, the turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17a, and the turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17b, and during this period, current flows into the EL element 15 (lighting state). Furthermore, the gate of the crystal 11 b and the gate of the transistor 11 c are connected to the same gate signal line 17a, but the gate of the transistor Ub and the gate of the transistor Uc may be connected to different gate signal lines. 17. The gate signal line of 1 pixel is 3 (the structure of Figure 1 is 2). By individually controlling the on/off timing of the gate of the transistor Ub and the on/off timing of the gate of the transistor i lc , the variation of the current value of the 2EL element 15 caused by the variation of the transistor 11a can be further reduced. By combining the gate #1 line 17a and the gate signal line 17b to form a different conductivity type (N channel and p channel) of the transistor 11c and the lid, the simplification of the driving circuit can be achieved, and the aperture ratio of the pixel can be improved. The configuration is as described above, and as the operation timing of the present invention, the write path from the signal line is turned off. That is, when a specific current is memorized, if the flow path of the current has a branch, the correct current value is not stored in the source (s)_the idle (G) capacitor (capacitor) of the transistor 11a. By making the transistor ilc and the transistor lld 94992-961016.doc 23 1295792 different conductivity types, the timing of the switching, lid. 'In order to control the threshold of each other, the transistor can be turned on after the transistor 1 lc is turned off in the scanning line. The purpose of the invention is to propose that a change in the characteristics of the transistor does not affect the circuit configuration of the display, and therefore requires 4 above the transistor. When the circuit constant is determined based on the characteristics of the electric crystals, if the characteristics of the four transistors do not match, it is difficult to obtain an appropriate circuit constant. For the long-axis direction of the laser irradiation, the channel direction is horizontal and vertical, and the threshold and mobility of the transistor characteristics are different. Moreover, the degree of change in any case is the same. In the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, the average values of the mobility and the threshold value are different. Therefore, the channel directions of all the transistors constituting the pixel should be the same. In Fig. 27, when the current flowing into the EL element 15 is set, the signal current flowing into the transistor 271a is Iw, and as a result, the voltage between the gate and the source generated in the transistor 271a is Vgs. At the time of writing, the transistor ?101 is short-circuited between the gate and the drain of the transistor 271a, so that the transistor 2 71a operates in the saturation region, so Iw is given by the following equation. (Formula 1)

Iw =μ1 · Coxl · { Wl/(2 · L1)} · (Vgs-Vthl)2 在此’ Cox為每皁位面積之閘極電容,以C〇x = g〇 · 8r/d所 賦予。Vth表示電晶體之臨限值,μ表示載體之遷移率,w 表示通道寬,L表示通道長,εΟ表示真空遷移率,εΓ表示閘 極絕緣膜之相對介電常數,d為閘極絕緣膜之厚度。若流入 EL元件15之電流為Idd,貝Odd係由串聯連接於el元件15之 94992-961016.doc -24· 1295792 間電壓 區域動 電晶體27lb控制電流位準。於本發明,其閘極_源極 與(式1)之Vgs —致,因此若假定電晶體丨b在飽和 作,則以下算式將成立。 (式2)Iw = μ1 · Coxl · { Wl / (2 · L1)} · (Vgs - Vthl) 2 where ' Cox is the gate capacitance per soap area, given by C 〇 x = g 〇 · 8r / d. Vth represents the threshold of the transistor, μ represents the mobility of the carrier, w represents the channel width, L represents the channel length, ε Ο represents the vacuum mobility, ε Γ represents the relative dielectric constant of the gate insulating film, and d is the gate insulating film The thickness. If the current flowing into the EL element 15 is Idd, the Bayer Odd is controlled by a voltage region electro-optical crystal 27b between 94992-961016.doc -24·1295792 connected in series to the EL element 15. In the present invention, the gate_source is coincident with the Vgs of (Formula 1), so if the transistor 丨b is assumed to be saturated, the following equation will hold. (Formula 2)

Idrv =μ2 · Cox2 · { W2/(2 · L2)} · (Vgs-Vth2)2 為了絕緣閘極場效型薄膜電晶體(電晶體)在飽和區域動 作之條件係以Vds為汲極•源極間電壓,一般以 > 卜异式賦 予。 (式3)Idrv = μ2 · Cox2 · { W2/(2 · L2)} · (Vgs-Vth2)2 The condition for the operation of the gate region of the thin film transistor (transistor) in the saturation region is Vds as the source of the drain The voltage between the poles is generally given by > (Formula 3)

I Vds I > I Vgs-Vth I 在此,電晶體271a及電晶體271b由於接近微小的像素内 部而形成,因此大致# 1=//2及Coxl=Cox2,若未特別注咅 的話’可說為Vth 1 = Vth2。如此一來,此時將容易由(式丄) 及(式2)導出以下算式。 (式4)I Vds I > I Vgs-Vth I Here, since the transistor 271a and the transistor 271b are formed close to the inside of a minute pixel, approximately #1=//2 and Coxl=Cox2, if not specifically noted, Said Vth 1 = Vth2. As a result, at this time, it is easy to derive the following formula from (Formula 丄) and (Formula 2). (Formula 4)

Idrv/Iw=(W2/L2)/(Wl/L 1) 在此應注意之點為(式1)及(式2)中,#、Cox、Vth之值本 身一般在各像素、各製品或各製造批件有變動,但(式4)不 包含此專參數’因此Idrv/Iw之值不依存於此等變動。 假定設計成 W1=W2、L1=L2,Idrv/Iw=l,亦即 Iw與Idrv 為同一值。亦即,不受限於電晶體之特性變動,流入EL元 件1 5之驅動電流Idd正確地與信號電流IW相同,因此結果可 正確控制EL元件1 5之發光亮度。 94992-961016.doc -25- 1295792 如以上,由於驅動用電晶體27la之Vthl與驅動用電晶體 2 7 1 b之Vth2基本上相同,因此若對於兩電晶體互相位於共 同電位之閘極施加截止位準之信號電壓的話,電晶體27 i a 及電晶體27 lb均應成為非導通狀態。然而實際上,像素内 仍可能由於參數變動等要因,Vth2變得比Vthl低。於此時, 次臨界位準之漏電流流入驅動用電晶體27lb,因此El元件 1 5呈現微發光。由於此微發光,晝面之對比降低,有損顯 示特性。 於本發明’特別使驅動用電晶體27lb之臨限電壓Vth2不 低於像素内對應之驅動用電晶體271a之臨限電壓Vthl而進 行設定。例如:使電晶體271b之閘極長L2比電晶體271a之 閘極長L1長,即使此等薄膜電晶體之製程參數變動,仍使 Vth2不低於Vthl。藉此,可抑制微小之電流漏洩。以上事 項亦適用於圖1之電晶體271a與電晶體lie之關係。 如圖27所示’除了信號電流流動之驅動用電晶體271a、 控制流入EL元件1 5等所組成之發光元件之驅動電流之驅動 用電晶體271b以外,構成上還包含:藉由閘極信號線17al 之控制而將像素電路與資料線data連接或遮斷之取入用電 晶體11 b、藉由閘極信號線丨7a2之控制而於寫入期間中使電 晶體271 a之閘極•汲極短路之開關用電晶體丨丨〇、用於在寫 入結束後仍保持電晶體27 la之閘極-源極間電壓之電容c 19 及作為發光元件之EL元件15等。 於圖27,電晶體ilb、Uc係以N通道M〇s(NMC)S)構成, 其他之電晶體係以p通道M〇s(PM〇s)構成,但此係一例, 94992-961016.doc •26- 1295792 未必需要按照此。雷玄C将盆一 -¾. J.0, ? 电合L1示共 方‘子連接於電晶體271 a 閘極另方柒子連接於Vdd(電源電位),但不限於Vdd, 任意之一定電位亦可。EL元件15之陰極(Cath〇de)連接於接 地電位。故以上事項當然亦適用於圖1等。 再者,圖1等之Vdd電壓宜比電晶體27 lb之關閉電壓(電晶 體為P通道時)低,具體而言,Vgh(閘極之關閉電壓)至少應 比Vdd-0.5(V)高。若比此低,將產生電晶體之關閉漏電, 雷射退火之照射不均變得明顯。又,應比vdd+4(v)低,若 太高的話,反而會增加關閉漏電量。 因此,閘極之關閉電壓(Vgh,亦即接近電源電壓之電壓 側)應在-0.5(V)以上、+4(v)以下。並且較佳者為電源電壓 (圖1為Vdd)應在0(V)以上、+2(v)以下。總言之,使施加於 閘極#號線之電晶體之關閉電壓充分關閉。電晶體為N通道 時,Vgl成為關閉電壓,因此vgl係對於gnd電壓,成為-4(v) 以上、0·5(ν)以下之範圍。並且更好在_2(V)以上、〇(V)以 下之範圍。 以上事項係針對圖1之電流程式之像素構成說明,但並不 限定於此’當然亦可適用於電壓程式之像素構成。再者, 電壓程式之Vt偏移取消宜對於各r、g、B個別補償。 驅動用電晶體271b係於閘極接受保持於電容器19之電壓 位準,將具有按照其之電流位準之驅動電流,經由通道而 流入EL元件15。電晶體27 la之閘極及電晶體271b之閘極直 接連接’構成電流鏡電路,並使信號電流IW之電流位準與 驅動電流之電流位準成為比例關係。 94992-961016.doc -27- 1295792 電晶體271b在飽和區域動作,將相應於施加在其閘極之 電壓位準與臨限電壓之差之驅動電流流入E l元件1 5。 電晶體271 b係其臨限電壓不低於像素内對應之電晶體 271&之臨限電;1而設定。具體而言,電晶體27113係其閘極 長不短於電晶體271a之閘極長而設定,或者電晶體271b亦 可其閘極絕緣膜不薄於像素内對應之電晶體271&之閘極絕 緣膜而設定。 或者’電晶體271b亦可調整注入其通道之雜質濃度,使 臨限電壓不低於像素内對應之電晶體271&之臨限電壓而設 定。假設使電晶體271 a及電晶體271b之臨限電壓相同而設 定時,若截止位準之信號電壓施加於共同連接之電晶體之 閘極,電晶體271a及電晶體271b雙方均應成為關閉狀態。 然而實際上’像素内亦有些微的製程參數之變動,電晶體 271b之臨限電壓可能變得比電晶體271&之臨限電壓低。 於此時,即使在截止位準以下之信號電壓,由於次臨界 位準之微弱電流流入驅動用電晶體271b,因此el元件15微 發光,出現晝面對比下降。因此,使電晶體”“之閘極長 比電晶體271a之閘極長。藉此,電晶體此製程參數即使 在像素内變動,電晶體㈣之臨限電壓仍不致低於電晶體 27 la之臨限電壓。 在閘極長L相對較短之短通道效應區域A,隨著閘極長乙 的増加’ Vth上升。另-方面,在問極長L相對較大之抑制 ^或B ’無論間極長L為何,軸大致一定。利用特性,使電 曰曰體271b之閘極長比電晶體2川之閘極長長。例如··電晶體 94992-961016.doc 1295792 27la之閘極長為7 μηι時,電晶體27lb之閘極長設定在i〇 程度。 電晶體271 a之閘極長屬於短通道效應區域Α,另一方面亦 可使電晶體27 lb之閘極長屬於抑制區域]^。藉此,可抑制電 晶體271b之短通道效應,同時可抑制製程參數變動所造成 之臨限電壓降低。藉由以上,可抑制流入電晶體271b之次 臨界位準之漏電流’抑制EL元件1 5之微發光,有助於改善 對比。 將直電麼施加於如此製作之圖1、圖2、圖2 7等所說明 之EL元件15 ’以一定電流密度1〇 mA/cm2連續驅動。^^構 造體可確認到7.0 V、200 cd/cm2之綠色(發光極大波長 Amax=460 nm)發光。藍色發光部獲得亮度1〇〇(^^2、顏 色座標為χ=0· 129、y=0· 105之發光色,綠色發光部獲得亮度 200 cd/cm2、顏色座標為χ=〇·340、y=〇 625之發光色,紅色 發光部獲得亮度100 cd/cm2、顏色座標為χ=〇.649、丫=〇.338 之發光色。 由於若提升開口率,光的利用效率上升,將導致高亮度 化或長壽命化,因此於全彩有機EL顯示面板,提升開口率 為重要的開發課題。為了提升開口率,只要縮小遮蔽來自 有機EL層之光之電晶體面積即可。相較於非晶矽,低溫多 晶Si-電晶體具有10〜1〇〇倍的性能,電流供給能力高,因此 可非常縮小電晶體之大小。因此,於有機此顯示面板,宜 以低溫多晶矽技術、高溫多晶矽技術製作像素電晶體、周 邊驅動電路,當然亦得以非晶矽技術形成,但像素開口率 94992-961016.doc -29- 1295792 變得甚小。 精由在玻璃基板71上,形成閘極驅動器電路12或源極驅 動器電路14等驅動電路,可降低在電流驅動之有機el顯示 面板特別成為問題之電阻。除了消除TCp之連接電阻,相 車乂於TCP連接之情況,從電極之拉出線變短2〜3 mm,配線 電阻變小。並且具有無須為了 TCp連接之工序,材料成本 下降之優點。 其次,說明有關本發明之EL顯示面板或示裝置。圖 6係以EL顯示裝置之電路為中心之說明圖。像素16配置或形 成矩陣狀,於各像素16連接有源極驅動器電路14,以輸出 進行各像素之電流程式之電流。源極驅動器電路14之輸出 段形成對應於影像信號之位元數之電流鏡電路(待後續說 明)。例如:若是64灰度,63個電流鏡電路形成於各源極信 號線’藉由選擇此等電流鏡電路之個數,可將期望之電流 施加於源極信號線18而構成。 再者,1個電流鏡電路之1個單位電晶體之最小輸出電流 設定在10 ΠΑ以上、50 nA以下。特別是為了確保構成源極 驅動器IC14内之電流鏡電路之電晶體之精度,電流鏡電路 之最小輸出電流宜I5 nA以上、35 nA以下。 又,内建預充電或放電電路,其係將源極信號線丨8之電 荷強制放出或充電者。由於EL元件15之臨限值在RGB不 同因此將源極信號線1 8之電荷強制放出或充電之預充電 或放電電路之電壓(電流)輸出值宜在R、G、B獨立設定而構 成0 94992-961016.doc -30- 1295792 以上說明之像素構 用於以下⑽ 咸陣列構成、面板構成等,當然適 :於以下說明之構成、方法、裝置。又,以下說 方法、裝置當然適用已說明 構成等.。 像素構成、陣列構成、面板 @ 12係内建閘極信號線⑽之偏移暫存器電 a及閑極信號線m用之偏移暫存器電路仙 ^器電路61係以正相及負相之時鐘信號(: :)、開始脈衝(STx)所控制。此外’宜附加控制閘極 之輸出、非輸出之致能⑽胤)信號及上下逆轉偏 移方向之上下(UPDWM)信號。其他宜設置輸出端子等,確 認開始脈衝朝偏移暫存器偏移且輸出。 再者偏移暫存器之偏移時序係以來自控制工⑶之控制 信號控制。而且,内建進行外部資料之位準偏移之位準偏 移電路,並且内建檢查電路。 圖8為本發明之顯示裝置之信號、電壓供給之構成圖或顯 不裝置之構成圖。由控制IC81供給至源極驅動器電路14a之 信號(電源配線、資料配線等)係經由可撓性基板84而供給。 於圖8,閘極驅動器12之控制信號係於控制IC產生,於源 極驅動器14一旦進行位準偏移後,施加於閘極驅動器12。 由於源極驅動器14之驅動電壓為4〜8(V),因此可將控制 IC81所輸出之3·3(ν)振幅之控制信號,轉換成閘極驅動器 所接受之5(V)振幅。 以下’說明有關本發明之驅動方法。本發明係專用於有 機EL面板驅動之亮度調整驅動。有機el元件係按照儲存於 94992-961016.doc -31 - 1295792 儲存電容19之電荷及Vdd,與流入驅動電晶體11a之電流量 成比例而發光。因此,如圖12所示,流入面板之總電流與 面板之亮度關係為線性。如圖24所示,為了將電流流入有 機EL面板之電壓vdd係由電池241所供應。 此電池241具有容量的限制,特別是使用於小型模組的情 況’可流出之電流量變少。假設如圖25所示,電池241只能 流出有機EL面板所消耗電力的50%為止。在此,若以251所 示之直線’決定有機EL元件所發出之亮度(全面白顯示為 1 00G/〇)與電力之關係,在亮度高之區域將超過電池所能流出 之最大電流量,因此唯恐破壞電池。 相反地,如252所示,若使有機el面板之最大發光時所流 之電流量與電池241所能流出之最大電流量相同,決定亮度 與電力之關係的話,於低亮度部將無法流入電流。一般而 言’若將影像資料為全面白顯示狀態設為1〇〇%,3〇%附近 被稱為多。若設定成252所示之亮度與電流量之關係,在影 像資料多的區域,將無法流入電流,成為不鮮豔的圖像。 因此,於本發明係如圖26所示,設定特定之輸入資料, 按照該資料’提案調整流入有機EL面板之電流量之驅動, 其係在可能超過電池之臨界值之區域抑制電流值,在不太 流入電流之區域增加電流量之驅動方法。若實現此驅動方 法,有機EL面板之亮度與電流量之關係成為如同282,即使 有電池的容量限制,仍可在影像資料多的區域流入電流, 製作鮮餘度良好之圖像。本發明之内容係組合2種驅動方 法,以下說明邊驅動方法及適用之電路構成。第一驅動方 94992-961016.doc -32- 1295792 法係與以往—般的驅動方法相同,來自外部之輸入影像資 料及採用自我發^件之顯示襄置之畫面亮度,或者流入 自我發光元件之陽極電極及陰極電極間之電流量之關係為 1: 1對應,亦即對於i個輸人影像資料所取得之電流量之值 為!個預先蚊之值’以按照來自外部之輸人影像信號之第 -亮度使各顯示像素發光。x,其等處於比例關係,理想 上為線形地成比例。於本發明特別說明適用於低灰度側(黑 顯示側)驅動之情況。 另一方面,第二驅動方法係來自外部之輸入影像資料及 採用自我發光元件之顯示裝置之晝面亮度,或者流入自我 發光元件之陽極電極及陰極電極間之電流量之關係並非 1 : 1對應、,而1決定考慮到周彡之輸入影像資料之分佈狀 況之電流量,亦即決定由可變值之中所設定之某值。因此, 不同於之刖之第一驅動方法,不限於線形之比例關係,多 成為非線形關係。此時,以第二亮度使各顯示像素發光, 而該第二亮度係以特定比例抑制按照來自外部之輸入影像 信號之第一亮度者。因此,不同於之前之第一驅動,不限 於線形之比例關係,多成為非線形關係。 於第二驅動方法,電流量之值係首先於假定對於由外部 輸入之影像資料施加第一驅動方法時之電流量為i時,乘以 某特定常數(1以下之數),可獲得受抑制之電流量。關於常 數值係按照周邊之輸入影像信號之分佈狀況而每次決定。 又,驅動方法之特徵在於,如之前所述,由於在影像資料 多的區域欲大量流入電流,因此若將對於不進行抑制處理 94992-961016.doc -33- 1295792 時之最大輸入資料之電力或電流量視為丨,在適用第二驅動 之區域,以使電力值X成為0.2$χ$0·6之方式調整電力或電 流量。 再者,於進行第二驅動之電路設置開關手段,控制第二 驅動手段之入切,以便可在開啟第二驅動手段時,進行本 發明之驅動方法,而在關閉第二驅動手段時,使與以往之 驅動方法具有互換性。 作為調整電流值之方法,提案2種方法。一為減少流入源 極L號線1 8之電流量,調整流入有機EL元件之電流量本身籲 之方法。然而,此方法在抑制電流量之際,必須減少流入 源極仏唬線18之電流量。如前所示,有機EL元件係按照儲 存於儲存電容19之電荷而發光,為了使輸入之資料正確發 光,必須儲存使正確電流值流入儲存電容19之電荷。 」而實際上,於源極信號線18存在浮游電容45 1,為了使 原極仏號線電壓由V2變化至v卜必須拉出此浮游電容之電 ' 拉出所铯費的時間△ τ為△ Q(浮游電容之電荷)=ι(流 二源極仏就線之電流)xAT=C(浮游電容值)><△ V。目此,若籲 咸乂、電:值1 ’將無法於儲存電容19儲存正確的電荷,又, *…7、“氣值’將難以表現灰度。若欲以灰度表現灰 度,必須將用 ― 用以顯不黑之電流值及表現白之電流值之差進 行1024等分。囡 — u此’右減少表現白之電流值,每1灰度之電 流變化量變小, , 為了表現灰度之精度變高,難以實現。 首先,說明古M & ’關為了判斷影像之顯示資料。顯示資料係 由圖像資料赤 -曲板之消耗電流(流入陽極電極與陰極電極 94992-961016.doc -34- 1295792 間之電流)導出。於太叙^ 士 本毛明中,以%表示顯示資料,100%為 顯不貝料之最大值’亦即所有像素在最高灰度發光之狀 態’ 〇%為所有像素在最低灰度發光之狀態。 1旦面之圖像貝料在全體上大時,圖像資料的總和變大。 例如:白光澤以64灰度顯示時,作為圖像資料為63,因此 晝面50之像素數x63為圖像資料之總和。於ι/ι〇〇之白視窗 顯示’白顯示部在最大亮度之白顯示時,圖像資料之總和 為畫面50之像素數…/刚)^(資料和之最大值卜 占於本發明,求取可預_像資料之總和或畫面之消耗電 机里之值,根據此總和或值,進行抑制流入自我發光元件 之陽極電極與陰極電極間之電流量之驅動。 再者,雖求取圖像資料之總和,但不限定於此。例如: 求取圖像資料之^貞之平均位準,採用此亦可。若是類比信 旎,藉由電容器將類比圖像信號過濾,可獲得平均位準。 對於類比之影像信號,經由濾波器擷取直流位準,將此直 流位準進行AD轉換而作為圖像資料之總和亦可。此時,圖 像資料亦可稱為APL位準。 於本發明中,有將顯示資料寫成輸入資料之情況,但此 為同義語。 又,無須加算構成畫面之圖像之所有資料,亦可挑選畫 面之i/w(w係比1大之值)並擷取,求取挑選之資料之總和。 資料和/最大值係與顯示資料(輸入資料)之比例同義。若 資料和/最大值為1,輸入資料為100%(基本上為最大之白光 澤顯示)。若資料和/最大值為〇,輸入資料為。(基本上為 94992-961016.doc -35- 1295792 完全之黑光澤顯示)。 貝料和/最大值係由影像資料之和求取。輸入影像資料為 y、u、v時,亦可由γ(亮度)信號求取。然而,£[面板之情 况由於在R、G、B之發光效率不同,因此由γ信號求取之 值不會成為耗電。因此,於γ、U、v之情況,亦宜暫且轉 換成R、G、β信號,按照R、G、B而在電流乘以換算之係 數求取消耗電流(耗電)。然而,亦可考量簡易地由γ信號 求取消耗電流將使電路處理變得容易。 為了以良好精度求取顯示資料之比例,進行運算即可, 所謂運算係包含加算、減算、乘算、除算。 又,亦有利用外部電路測定流入有機EL面板之電流值, 糟由回授判斷之方法。同樣地,亦可利用藉由在有機虹面 板内内建熱敏電阻或熱電對等溫度感測器或光感測器所獲 得之資料。 顯示資料係以流入面板之電流,亦即流入自我發光元件 之陽極電極與陰極電極間之電流量所換算。因為由於在el 顯示面板,B之發光效率不佳,因此若顯示海的顯示等,耗 電將一口氣增加最大值為電源容量之最大值,而且 所謂電源和並非單純的影像資料之加算值,而是將影像資 料換算成消耗電流者。因此,亮燈率亦由對於最大電流之 各圖像的使用電流求出。 第二係將流入源極信號線之電流值J原樣轉變成〗畫面亮 燈之水平掃描線數(亮燈率),以便控制亮度。有機el面板 可控制電晶體lid之開啟時間,以便控制水平掃描線之1幅 94992-961016.doc -36 - 1295792 内之亮燈時間。如圖14所示,若控制閘極驅動器12,進行 使僅於丨幅内之1/N期間亮燈之驅動,亮度係成為對於所有 水平掃描線經常亮燈之情況之亮度的1/N。藉由此方法可調 整亮度。於此方法,由於在發光期間控制亮度,因此即使 技制發光ΐ ’對於流入為了實現灰度表現之源極信號線之 电流值所要求之精度不變,故容易實現灰度表現。因此, 本發明提案藉由控制亮燈率以抑制流入有機EL面板之電流 里之驅動方法。 免燈率與輸入資料之關係不只限於比例關係,如圖29所 示,亦可為曲線或折線。若考慮如29丨維持一定期間高亮燈 率之狀況’其後按照資料降低亮燈率而進行之型態,一般 影像資料之亮度多在30%(全面白顯示為ι00%)附近之點的 活’可說是有效。假設電池241之容量可流入有機el面板之 最大電流量的50°/❶可流入,即使輸入資料使亮燈率最大, 達到最大之50%之區域,仍不會破壞電池。 又’控制亮度不必要將電晶體1 Id完全關閉,在少量電流 流入電晶體lid,有機EL元件15微發光之狀態,仍可控制亮 度。 又’非發光或微發光期間係使有機EL元件1 5非發光或微 發光,不限於藉由電晶體1 Id之開啟及關閉所產生者。例 如:如圖132或圖133所示,即使是沒有電晶體lid之構成, 仍可藉由升降陽極電壓或陰極電壓,產生非發光或微發光 期間。 又,本發明係控制施加於有機EL元件15之電流,如圖76 94992-961016.doc -37- 1295792 所示之電路構成亦與控制76lg相同。 又,為了控制亮度之非發光部不限於水平掃描線,亦即 不限於像素列方向,可控制源極驅動器14,於像素列方向 做出非發光或微發光期間,以便控制亮度。 藉由做出微發光或非發光期間,可於顯示影像中之像章 =方向或像素行方向,進行微發光或非發光顯示。將此德 奄光或非發光之顯示加入顯示影像中則稱為黑插入。Idrv/Iw=(W2/L2)/(Wl/L 1) The point to note here is that in (Formula 1) and (Formula 2), the values of #, Cox, and Vth are generally in each pixel, each product, or There are variations in each manufacturing lot, but (Formula 4) does not include this special parameter 'so the value of Idrv/Iw does not depend on these changes. Assume that W1=W2, L1=L2, Idrv/Iw=l, that is, Iw and Idrv are the same value. That is, the driving current Idd flowing into the EL element 15 is correctly the same as the signal current IW without being limited to the characteristic variation of the transistor, and as a result, the luminance of the EL element 15 can be accurately controlled. 94992-961016.doc -25- 1295792 As above, since Vth1 of the driving transistor 27la is substantially the same as Vth2 of the driving transistor 27 1b, if the gates of the two transistors are at the common potential, the gate is applied. When the signal voltage is level, both the transistor 27 ia and the transistor 27 lb should be in a non-conducting state. However, in reality, Vth2 becomes lower than Vthl due to factors such as parameter variation. At this time, the leakage current of the subcritical level flows into the driving transistor 27lb, so that the El element 15 exhibits microluminescence. Due to this micro-luminescence, the contrast of the kneading surface is lowered, which detracts from the display characteristics. In the present invention, the threshold voltage Vth2 of the driving transistor 27lb is set to be not lower than the threshold voltage Vth1 of the corresponding driving transistor 271a in the pixel. For example, the gate length L2 of the transistor 271b is longer than the gate length L1 of the transistor 271a, and even if the process parameters of the thin film transistors are changed, Vth2 is not lower than Vth1. Thereby, a small current leakage can be suppressed. The above matters also apply to the relationship between the transistor 271a of Fig. 1 and the transistor lie. As shown in Fig. 27, in addition to the driving transistor 271a through which the signal current flows, and the driving transistor 271b for controlling the driving current of the light-emitting elements formed by the EL element 15 and the like, the configuration further includes: by the gate signal The gate 11a is controlled to connect or disconnect the pixel circuit and the data line data into the transistor 11b, and the gate of the transistor 271a is controlled during the writing period by the control of the gate signal line 7a2. The switching transistor transistor for short-circuiting, the capacitor c 19 for maintaining the gate-source voltage of the transistor 27 la after the end of writing, the EL element 15 as a light-emitting element, and the like. In Fig. 27, the transistors ilb and Uc are composed of N-channel M〇s (NMC)S), and other electro-crystalline systems are composed of p-channel M〇s (PM〇s), but this is an example, 94992-961016. Doc •26- 1295792 does not necessarily need to follow this. Lei Xuan C will be a pot -3⁄4. J.0, ? Electricity L1 shows the common side 'sub-connected to the transistor 271 a The other side of the gate is connected to Vdd (power supply potential), but not limited to Vdd, any certain The potential is also available. The cathode (Cath〇de) of the EL element 15 is connected to the ground potential. Therefore, the above matters are of course applicable to Figure 1 and the like. Furthermore, the Vdd voltage of FIG. 1 and the like should be lower than the closing voltage of the transistor 27 lb (when the transistor is a P channel), specifically, Vgh (the closing voltage of the gate) should be at least higher than Vdd-0.5 (V). . If it is lower than this, the shutdown leakage of the transistor will occur, and the uneven illumination of the laser annealing becomes apparent. Also, it should be lower than vdd+4(v). If it is too high, it will increase the power leakage. Therefore, the gate closing voltage (Vgh, that is, the voltage side close to the power supply voltage) should be -0.5 (V) or more and +4 (v) or less. Preferably, the power supply voltage (Vdd in Fig. 1) should be above 0 (V) and below +2 (v). In summary, the turn-off voltage of the transistor applied to the gate # line is sufficiently turned off. When the transistor is in the N channel, Vgl becomes the off voltage, and therefore vgl is in the range of -4 (v) or more and 0·5 (ν) or less for the gnd voltage. And it is better in the range of _2 (V) or more and 〇 (V). The above description is directed to the pixel configuration of the current program of Fig. 1, but is not limited thereto. It is of course also applicable to the pixel configuration of the voltage program. Furthermore, the Vt offset cancellation of the voltage program should be individually compensated for each r, g, and B. The driving transistor 271b is connected to the gate electrode at a voltage level held by the capacitor 19, and has a driving current according to the current level thereof, and flows into the EL element 15 via the channel. The gate of transistor 27 la and the gate of transistor 271b are directly connected to form a current mirror circuit, and the current level of signal current IW is proportional to the current level of the drive current. 94992-961016.doc -27- 1295792 The transistor 271b operates in a saturation region, and a driving current corresponding to the difference between the voltage level applied to the gate thereof and the threshold voltage flows into the E1 element 15. The transistor 271 b is set such that its threshold voltage is not lower than the corresponding voltage of the corresponding transistor 271 & Specifically, the transistor 27113 is set such that its gate length is not shorter than the gate length of the transistor 271a, or the transistor 271b may have its gate insulating film not thinner than the gate of the corresponding transistor 271 & Set with an insulating film. Alternatively, the transistor 271b can also adjust the impurity concentration of the channel implanted therein so that the threshold voltage is not lower than the threshold voltage of the corresponding transistor 271 & Assuming that the threshold voltages of the transistors 271a and 271b are the same, if the signal voltage of the cutoff level is applied to the gate of the commonly connected transistor, both the transistor 271a and the transistor 271b should be turned off. . However, in practice, there are slight variations in the process parameters in the pixel, and the threshold voltage of the transistor 271b may become lower than the threshold voltage of the transistor 271 & At this time, even if the signal voltage is below the cutoff level, the weak current due to the subcritical level flows into the driving transistor 271b, so that the el element 15 is slightly illuminated, and the face-to-face ratio is lowered. Therefore, the gate of the transistor "" is made longer than the gate of the transistor 271a. Thereby, even if the process parameter of the transistor changes within the pixel, the threshold voltage of the transistor (4) is not lower than the threshold voltage of the transistor 27 la. In the short channel effect region A where the gate length L is relatively short, as the gate length B increases, the 'Vth rises. On the other hand, in the case where the extremely long L is relatively large, the suppression ^ or B ' is substantially constant regardless of the length L. By utilizing the characteristics, the gate length of the electrode body 271b is longer than that of the transistor. For example, • Transistor 94992-961016.doc 1295792 When the gate length of 27la is 7 μηι, the gate length of the transistor 27 lb is set to i〇. The gate length of the transistor 271a belongs to the short channel effect region Α, and on the other hand, the gate length of the transistor 27 lb is the suppression region]. Thereby, the short channel effect of the transistor 271b can be suppressed, and the threshold voltage drop caused by the variation of the process parameters can be suppressed. With the above, it is possible to suppress the leakage current which flows into the subcritical level of the transistor 271b, and suppress the microluminescence of the EL element 15 to contribute to the improvement of the contrast. The EL element 15' described in Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 2, and the like thus produced is continuously driven at a constant current density of 1 mA mA/cm 2 . The ^^ structure was confirmed to emit light at 7.0 V, 200 cd/cm2 green (luminous maximum wavelength Amax = 460 nm). The blue light-emitting portion obtains a luminance of 1 〇〇 (^^2, a color coordinate of χ=0·129, y=0·105, a luminance of 200 cd/cm2 for the green light-emitting portion, and a color coordinate of χ=〇·340 , y=〇625 illuminating color, the red illuminating part obtains a brightness of 100 cd/cm2, and the color coordinates are χ=〇.649, 丫=〇.338. If the aperture ratio is increased, the light utilization efficiency increases. In order to increase the aperture ratio, it is important to develop an aperture ratio in a full-color organic EL display panel. In order to increase the aperture ratio, it is only necessary to reduce the area of the transistor that shields light from the organic EL layer. In the amorphous germanium, the low-temperature polycrystalline Si-crystal has a performance of 10 to 1 times, and the current supply capability is high, so that the size of the transistor can be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the organic display panel, low-temperature polysilicon technology should be used. The high-temperature polysilicon technology is used to fabricate the pixel transistor and the peripheral driving circuit. Of course, it is also formed by the amorphous germanium technology, but the pixel aperture ratio of 94092-961016.doc -29- 1295792 becomes small. The gate is formed on the glass substrate 71. Driver circuit 12 or The driver circuit such as the pole driver circuit 14 can reduce the resistance which is particularly problematic in the current-driven organic EL display panel. In addition to eliminating the connection resistance of the TCp, the phase pull-out line from the electrode becomes shorter in the case of the TCP connection. 3 mm, the wiring resistance becomes small, and there is an advantage that the material cost is not required for the TCp connection process. Next, the EL display panel or the display device according to the present invention will be described. Fig. 6 is a description centering on the circuit of the EL display device. The pixels 16 are arranged or formed in a matrix, and the source driver circuit 14 is connected to each of the pixels 16 to output a current program for each pixel. The output segment of the source driver circuit 14 forms the number of bits corresponding to the image signal. Current mirror circuit (to be described later). For example, if 64 gray scales, 63 current mirror circuits are formed on each source signal line 'by selecting the number of such current mirror circuits, the desired current can be applied to the source The signal line 18 is formed. Further, the minimum output current of one unit transistor of one current mirror circuit is set to 10 ΠΑ or more and 50 nA or less. In order to ensure the accuracy of the transistor constituting the current mirror circuit in the source driver IC 14, the minimum output current of the current mirror circuit should be I5 nA or more and 35 nA or less. Also, a precharge or discharge circuit is built in, which is a source signal. The charge of the coil 8 is forcibly discharged or charged. Since the threshold value of the EL element 15 is different in RGB, the voltage (current) output value of the precharge or discharge circuit for forcibly discharging or charging the source signal line 18 is suitable. The R, G, and B are independently set to constitute 0. 9499-961016.doc -30- 1295792 The pixel structure described above is used for the following (10) salt array structure, panel structure, and the like. Of course, the configuration, method, and apparatus described below are suitable. Further, the following description of the method and the device is of course applied to the description of the configuration and the like. Pixel structure, array structure, panel @12 system built-in gate signal line (10) offset register circuit a and idle signal line m offset register circuit circuit circuit 61 is positive and negative The phase signal (: :) and the start pulse (STx) are controlled. In addition, the output of the control gate, the non-output enable (10) 胤 signal, and the up-and-down reverse direction (UPDWM) signal should be added. Others should set the output terminal, etc., and confirm that the start pulse is shifted toward the offset register and output. Furthermore, the offset timing of the offset register is controlled by a control signal from the controller (3). Moreover, a level shift circuit for level shifting of external data is built in, and a check circuit is built in. Fig. 8 is a view showing the configuration of a signal and a voltage supply of a display device of the present invention or a configuration of a display device. The signal (power supply wiring, data wiring, etc.) supplied from the control IC 81 to the source driver circuit 14a is supplied via the flexible substrate 84. In Fig. 8, the control signal of the gate driver 12 is generated by the control IC, and is applied to the gate driver 12 once the source driver 14 is level-shifted. Since the driving voltage of the source driver 14 is 4 to 8 (V), the control signal of the 3·3 (ν) amplitude outputted from the control IC 81 can be converted into the 5 (V) amplitude accepted by the gate driver. The following describes the driving method relating to the present invention. The present invention is dedicated to brightness adjustment driving of an organic EL panel drive. The organic EL element emits light in accordance with the charge and Vdd stored in the storage capacitor 19 of 94992-961016.doc -31 - 1295792 in proportion to the amount of current flowing into the driving transistor 11a. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 12, the total current flowing into the panel is linear with the brightness of the panel. As shown in Fig. 24, the voltage vdd for flowing a current into the organic EL panel is supplied from the battery 241. This battery 241 has a capacity limitation, and particularly in the case of a small module, the amount of current that can flow out becomes small. Assume that as shown in Fig. 25, the battery 241 can only flow out of 50% of the power consumed by the organic EL panel. Here, if the relationship between the brightness emitted by the organic EL element (the total white display is 100 G/〇) and the electric power is determined by the straight line 251 shown in 251, the maximum current amount that the battery can flow out in the region where the brightness is high is exceeded. Therefore, fear of destroying the battery. On the contrary, as shown in 252, if the amount of current flowing when the maximum illumination of the organic EL panel is the same as the maximum amount of current that can be discharged from the battery 241, and the relationship between the brightness and the electric power is determined, the current cannot flow in the low-luminance portion. . In general, if the image data is set to 1〇〇% for the full white display state, the vicinity of 3〇% is called more. If the relationship between the brightness and the amount of current indicated by 252 is set, the current will not flow in the area where there is much image data, and it will become a non-bright image. Therefore, in the present invention, as shown in FIG. 26, a specific input data is set, and according to the data proposal, the driving of the current flowing into the organic EL panel is adjusted, and the current value is suppressed in a region that may exceed the critical value of the battery. A driving method that increases the amount of current in a region where current does not flow. When this driving method is implemented, the relationship between the brightness and the current amount of the organic EL panel becomes 282. Even if the capacity of the battery is limited, it is possible to flow a current in a region where there is a large amount of image data, and to produce an image with a good margin. The content of the present invention is a combination of two driving methods, and the side driving method and the applicable circuit configuration will be described below. The first driver 94092-961016.doc -32- 1295792 is the same as the conventional driving method, and the input image data from the outside and the brightness of the screen using the self-issuing device or the self-illuminating device The relationship between the amount of current between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode is 1:1, that is, the value of the current obtained for the i input image data! The value of the pre-mosquito' causes each display pixel to emit light in accordance with the first brightness from the external input image signal. x, which are in a proportional relationship, ideally proportional to a linear shape. In the present invention, the case where it is applied to the low-gradation side (black display side) driving is specifically described. On the other hand, the second driving method is based on the external input image data and the brightness of the surface of the display device using the self-luminous element, or the relationship between the amount of current flowing into the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the self-luminous element is not 1: 1 And 1 determines the amount of current that takes into account the distribution of the input image data of Zhou Wei, that is, determines a value set by the variable value. Therefore, the first driving method different from the above is not limited to the proportional relationship of the linear shapes, and is often a non-linear relationship. At this time, each of the display pixels is caused to emit light by the second brightness, and the second brightness is suppressed by the first brightness of the input image signal from the outside at a specific ratio. Therefore, unlike the previous first drive, it is not limited to the proportional relationship of the linear shapes, and more often becomes a non-linear relationship. In the second driving method, the value of the current amount is first obtained by multiplying a certain constant (1 or less) when a current amount when the first driving method is applied to the image data input from the outside is i, The amount of current. The constant value is determined each time according to the distribution of the surrounding input image signals. Further, the driving method is characterized in that, as described above, since a large amount of current flows in a region where a large amount of image data is required, if the maximum input data is not subjected to the suppression processing 94092-961016.doc -33 - 1295792 or The electric current is regarded as 丨, and the electric power or the current amount is adjusted so that the electric power value X becomes 0.2$χ$0·6 in the region where the second drive is applied. Furthermore, the circuit for setting the second driving is provided with a switching means for controlling the cutting of the second driving means so that the driving method of the present invention can be performed when the second driving means is turned on, and when the second driving means is turned off, It is interchangeable with previous driving methods. As a method of adjusting the current value, two methods are proposed. One is to reduce the amount of current flowing into the source L-line 18, and to adjust the amount of current flowing into the organic EL element. However, this method must reduce the amount of current flowing into the source winding 18 while suppressing the amount of current. As described above, the organic EL element emits light in accordance with the charge stored in the storage capacitor 19. In order to properly emit the input data, it is necessary to store the charge which causes the correct current value to flow into the storage capacitor 19. In fact, there is a floating capacitor 45 1 in the source signal line 18, in order to change the voltage of the primary pole 仏 line from V2 to v b, the time Δ τ of the electric power of the floating capacitor must be pulled out. △ Q (charge of floating capacitor) = ι (current of source 2 source 仏 line) xAT = C (floating capacitance value) > Δ V. If you want to use salty water and electricity: the value 1 'will not store the correct charge in the storage capacitor 19, and, *...7, "gas value" will be difficult to express gray scale. If you want to express grayscale in grayscale, you must The difference between the current value of the black light and the current value of the white color will be divided into 1024 equal parts. 囡—u this right reduces the current value of white, and the current change per 1 gray level becomes smaller, in order to perform The accuracy of gray scale becomes high, which is difficult to achieve. First, the description of the ancient M & 'in order to judge the display data of the image. The display data is the current consumption of the image data from the red-curved plate (flowing into the anode electrode and the cathode electrode 94092-961016) .doc -34- 1295792 current) derived. In Taixu ^ Shi Ben Mao Ming, the display data in %, 100% is the maximum value of the display material 'that is, all pixels in the state of the highest gray light' 〇 % is the state in which all pixels are illuminated at the lowest gray level. When the image of the image is large on the whole, the sum of the image data becomes larger. For example, when the white gloss is displayed in 64 gradations, the image data is 63, so the number of pixels of the face 50 x63 is the image The sum of the materials. In the white window of ι/ι〇〇, the white display is displayed in the white display of the maximum brightness. The sum of the image data is the number of pixels in the screen 50.../just) ^(The maximum value of the data and the maximum In the present invention, the sum of the pre-image data or the value of the consumption motor of the screen is obtained, and based on the sum or value, the driving of the amount of current flowing between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the self-luminous element is suppressed. Although the sum of the image data is obtained, it is not limited thereto. For example, it is also possible to obtain the average level of the image data, and if the analog signal is used, the analog image signal is filtered by the capacitor. The average level can be obtained. For the analog image signal, the DC level is extracted through the filter, and the DC level is AD-converted as the sum of the image data. At this time, the image data can also be called APL. In the present invention, there is a case where the display data is written as input data, but this is a synonym. Also, it is not necessary to add all the data constituting the image of the screen, and the i/w of the screen can also be selected (w ratio 1 Big value) The sum of the selected data. The data and / maximum value are synonymous with the ratio of the displayed data (input data). If the data and / maximum value is 1, the input data is 100% (basically the maximum white gloss display). The data and / maximum value are 〇, and the input data is (substantially 94992-961016.doc -35- 1295792 complete black gloss display). The material and / maximum value are obtained from the sum of the image data. Input image data When y, u, and v are used, they can also be obtained from the γ (luminance) signal. However, in the case of the panel, since the luminous efficiencies in R, G, and B are different, the value obtained from the γ signal does not become power consumption. Therefore, in the case of γ, U, and v, it is also necessary to temporarily convert into R, G, and β signals, and calculate the current consumption (power consumption) by multiplying the current by the converted factor according to R, G, and B. However, it is also conceivable to easily obtain the current consumption from the γ signal to make circuit processing easy. In order to obtain the ratio of the displayed data with good precision, the calculation can be performed. The so-called calculation system includes addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. Further, there is a method in which the current value flowing into the organic EL panel is measured by an external circuit, and the judgment is made by feedback. Similarly, data obtained by built-in thermistors or thermoelectric equivalent temperature sensors or photo sensors in the organic rainbow panel can also be utilized. The display data is converted by the current flowing into the panel, that is, the amount of current flowing between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the self-luminous element. Because the luminous efficiency of B is not good due to the display panel in the el, if the display of the sea is displayed, the power consumption will increase the maximum value to the maximum value of the power supply capacity, and the so-called power supply and the added value of the image data are not simple. Instead, the image data is converted into a current consumption. Therefore, the lighting rate is also obtained from the current used for each image of the maximum current. The second system converts the current value J flowing into the source signal line as it is to the horizontal scanning line number (lighting rate) of the picture lighting to control the brightness. The organic el panel controls the opening time of the transistor lid to control the lighting time in one of the horizontal scanning lines 94992-961016.doc -36 - 1295792. As shown in Fig. 14, when the gate driver 12 is controlled to perform driving for lighting only during the 1/N period in the frame, the brightness is 1/N of the brightness of the case where all the horizontal scanning lines are constantly lit. The brightness can be adjusted by this method. In this method, since the luminance is controlled during the light emission, even if the technical illumination ΐ ' does not change the accuracy required for the current value flowing into the source signal line for realizing the gradation, it is easy to realize the gradation expression. Therefore, the present invention proposes a driving method for suppressing the current flowing into the organic EL panel by controlling the lighting rate. The relationship between the lamp-free rate and the input data is not limited to the proportional relationship, as shown in Figure 29, and can also be a curve or a broken line. If you consider the situation where the high light-emitting rate is maintained for a certain period of time, then the pattern is reduced according to the data, and the brightness of the general image data is more than 30% (the overall white is displayed as ι00%). Live' can be said to be effective. It is assumed that the capacity of the battery 241 can flow into the organic EL panel at a maximum current of 50°/❶, and the battery can be prevented from being destroyed even if the input data causes the maximum lighting rate to reach a maximum of 50%. Further, it is not necessary to control the brightness to completely turn off the transistor 1 Id , and it is possible to control the brightness while a small amount of current flows into the transistor lid and the organic EL element 15 is slightly illuminated. Further, the non-light-emitting or micro-light-emitting period causes the organic EL element 15 to be non-light-emitting or micro-light-emitting, and is not limited to those produced by the opening and closing of the transistor 1 Id. For example, as shown in Fig. 132 or Fig. 133, even without the configuration of the transistor lid, a non-light-emitting or micro-light-emitting period can be generated by raising or lowering the anode voltage or the cathode voltage. Further, the present invention controls the current applied to the organic EL element 15, and the circuit configuration shown in Fig. 76 94992-961016.doc - 37 - 1295792 is also the same as the control 76lg. Further, the non-light-emitting portion for controlling the brightness is not limited to the horizontal scanning line, that is, not limited to the pixel column direction, and the source driver 14 can be controlled to perform non-light-emitting or micro-light-emitting periods in the pixel column direction to control the brightness. By making a micro-lighting or non-light-emitting period, a micro-lighting or a non-light-emitting display can be performed on the stamp = direction or the pixel row direction in the displayed image. Adding this deuterated or non-illuminated display to the display image is called black insertion.

又,輸入資料宜將最小與最大間,以2的11次方刻晝。你 如·全面黑亮燈若為〇,全面白亮燈為256(2的8次方)之傅 法。運算亮燈率之變化之際,為了求取變化量,必須以輕 入資:除以最大亮燈率及最小亮燈率。於半導體設計,: 入除算電路在電路構成上為極大的,屆肖,若使全面 白顯示時為2的n次方,斜率僅以使最大亮燈率與最小=燈 率之差為2進數,偏移8位元分而求得,因此若由半導體設 :的觀點考量,將無須組入除算電路,電路設計變得非常 合易。於如同291,實現一定期間保持最大亮燈率之後 漸降低党燈率之波形之際,在如圖3()所示之輸人資料之最 :::Γη次方為止間之亮燈率成為最大之波形,於以點 U直線型之曲線,若斜率為X,則僅於2的〆次方到 、 丨)人方為止之期間,使斜率為2χ,以便與直線型 冰相X #由&用此構造,僅求取直線型之斜率,於 折線型之曲線之降,介 «而^、夂、,',、、、"頁重新求取斜率,可不增大電路 規:而做成各種折線型之曲線。此係具有在電路設計上較 小構成電路規模之優點。 私 94992-9610l6.doc -38 - 1295792 接著於圖55,說明為了眚?目士邮心 ^ 局ί實現本驅動之電路構成。首先, 最初由影像源將職之顏色資料輸入551。相同資料並經由 r處理等圖像處理而輸入源極驅動器14。 rgb之顏色資料,但不限於職。亦可考慮YUVI= 由前述熱敏電阻或光感測器所獲得之溫度資料或亮度資料 亦可。於551擴張資料後,將資料輸入收集資料之模组w。 關於⑸之資料擴張待後述說明。於552,資料首次輸入加 法器552a,但在資料並未經常到來之情況,亦可能是圖像 資料以外之不定資料。因此,加法器灿藉由資料是否到 來之致能信號(DE)及時鐘(CLK)決定是否加算。然而,在以 預先使圖像諸料*輸人之電路構成進料,不需要致 能信號。加算後之資料儲存於暫存器55孔,而且於”仏, 以垂直同步信號(VD)鎖存,輸出暫存器之資料(2進數)之高 位8位元。不規定暫存器尺寸,暫存器尺寸越大,電路規模 越大,但加算資料之精度提高。又,輸出之資料不固定於8 位元,欲以更微細範圍進行亮燈率控制時,使輸出資料在9 位元以上即可,在精度不必要時,7位元以下亦無妨。輸出 值之最大值亦即成為輸入資料之刻度。輸出之8位元之最大 值為100時,輸入資料係以100分割判斷。如前述為了縮小 電路規模時,輸入資料宜以2的η次方刻晝。因此於551,為 了容易將1F間所獲得之資料進行255等分,進行資料擴張。 假設原樣將資料輸入552之情況,若輸出值最大成為1〇〇, 藉由在551使輸入資料本身成為2 55倍而輸入,可使輸出值 之最大成為255(若包含〇,有256(2的8次方)種)。 94992-961016.doc -39- 1295792 其次,輸出之8位元之值輸入至運算亮燈率之模組555。 於555輸入之值係作為亮燈率控制值556而運算、輸出。 亮燈率控制值556輸入至閘極控制區塊553 ’閘極控制區 塊553係與VD同步而初始化,具有藉由水平同步信號(hd) 而正數(Count up)之計數器554。 於圖56表示亮燈率控制值556為15時之閘極控制區塊553 之時間。計數器554為0時,STwm(高)(開啟開關電晶 體lib、11c)。爪係為了控制閘極信號線m之開始脈衝, 藉由17a,開啟/關閉開關電晶體llb、Uc。又,計數器554 為1時,ST4L0W(低),ST2為HI。ST2係為了控制閘極信 號線17b之開始脈衝,藉由17b,開啟/關閉開關電晶體13^。 亦即,ST2之HI期間之長度直接與有機£]1元件15之發光時 間有關。因此,亮燈率控制信號之值與計數器554同值時, 若ST2成為LOW,可藉由亮燈率控制信號之值調整有機£1^ 凡件15之發光量。假設亮燈率控制值556為,亮燈 率成為1/255,因此發光量成為1/255。藉此可控制亮度。使 ST1、2成為HI之計數器值並非固定在〇、i,可能考慮到圖 像資料之延遲而成為更大值。於圖55,亮燈率控制信號具 有8位元之值,亦可如圖57所示,亮燈率控制信號是在552 内部具有亮燈率之HI期間時間分之i位元之信號線。圖57 之情況,可邏輯運算ST2之信號線及亮燈率控制信號線,以 便控制亮燈時間。又,端視像素構成之開關電晶體丨lb、 11 c、11 d ’亦有反轉閘極信號線之邏輯之情況。 接著,提案一種在進行本發明之驅動之際,使亮燈率之 94992-961016.doc -40- 1295792 受化延遲之方法。如圖38所示,若輸入資料對於時間轴 〇’ 1’ 2’)大幅紇化,亮燈率將大幅變化。若變成此狀 况直面内之冗度將頻繁地變化,並引起閃燦。因此 圖39所示’取得現在之亮燈率與次巾貞預定變化之亮燈率之 差分丄使變化該差分之數%,以便緩和變化的比例。若表 現為算式’以時間t之亮燈率為γ⑴,由時間⑴之輸入資料 所异出之免燈率為Y —⑴,則Y(t + Ι)=γ⑴+ (γ - (t)-Y⑴)/㈣G)...(5Wx此算式使亮燈率變化時,若亮燈 率之差大’變化量亦變大’差小,變化量變小。因此,若s 過大,亮燈率變化所需時間變長。 ^於圖59表示亮燈率由G移動到_時,所需之賴與s之關 係。以60 Hz之頻率放映影像時,亮燈率由0%移動至100% 為止,s=32’約需要200幢,因此約花費3秒。若變化所需 時間超過此以上,反而亮度變化看起來不順利。又,若$太 小’無助於改善閃爍。在電路設計上,由於資料以2進數样 示,因此除算電路需要多數的邏輯,現實上無法實現 而,以2的η次方進行除算時,若以2進數標示之資料之左端 為取咼位位兀,右端為最低位位元的話,只要將η位元朝右 偏移,即可獲得與除算相同之效果,因此電路構成變得非 常容易。由前述觀點來看,s應為2心次方。於圖134表示 由全面黑顯示狀態成為纟面白顯示狀態之際之亮燈率的變 化。檢討的結果’ s=2時,改善效果小,但s=4時,閃燦受 到改善。又,若超過s=256,變化花費時間過多,因此無法 發揮抑制機能。由以上,本發明將s的範圍設定成 94992-961016.doc -41 - 1295792 256。並且,32尤佳。藉此,可獲得沒有閃爍的良好 顯不。再者,在電路設計以外,3不限定於2的n次方。又, 使式(5)之(Υ >⑴_Υ⑴)/s之分子(γ⑴)成為『倍時,s 的範圍亦成為r倍。 s不是經常一定亦可,亦有在亮燈率高的區域,由於閃燦 少,因此使s小於4的方法。因此,亦可於亮燈率高之區域 及低之區域,使s變化。例如:亮燈率在5〇%以上時,宜以2 Ss$16控制,亮燈率在5〇%以下時,宜以4gs^32控制。 又,若欲在降低亮燈率之情況及升高之情況改變速度 時’以Y (t)及Y(t)之大小關係改變s值亦有效。 於圖58表示使亮燈率之變化延遲之驅動方法之電路構 成如刖述,以加法器5 52a加算由551輸出之資料,並错存 於暫存器55沘。以運算模組運算與VD同步而輸出之8位元 之值,導出亮燈率控制值(t),γ /⑴輸入於減法模組 582。於減法模組582内,進行由保持現在之亮燈率控制值 之暫存器583所獲得之亮燈率控制值γ⑴與由現在之輸入資 料所導出之亮燈率控制值γ,⑴之減算,求出2個差分 s(t)。其次’ S(t)係藉由輸入之s值,在584内進行除算處理。 如前述,由於除算處理需要複雜的邏輯,因此藉由使輸入 之s值成為2的η次方,S(t)朝最低位位元(LSB)側偏移η位 元,從而可進行除算。 進行除算後之S(t)係與保持於暫存器583之現在之亮燈率 t制值Y(t) ’以加法模組5 8 5而加算。於5 8 5加算之值成為亮 燈率控制值556,輸入至閘極控制區塊553。又,此亮燈率 94992-961016.doc -42- 1295792 控制值556係藉由輸入至暫存^83,以便反映於次幢。 J而目58之方法之情況,將s⑴偏移n位元之際,僅使 偏移即丢棄資料,在精度上會出現問題。具體而言,Η時, 由於n=3 ’因此使偏移3位元,但s⑴約了以下數值時,若朝 LSB側偏移3位元,將成為〇。作為避免方法,使s⑴、· 均預先朝最高位位元⑽B)侧偏移n位元分,於輸出時,將 輸出資料朝LSB側偏移η位元分而輪出。或者如圖61所示, 將初始值Υ⑼朝刪側偏移η位元,儲存於暫存器M3。而 且將已加入s(t)之時點之資料,儲存於暫存器583,輸出 之資料朝LSB侧偏移n位元之後輸出。初始值朝聽側偏移 η位元之後所加入之S⑴係與朝LSB側偏移n位元者獲得相 同效果,並且儲存於暫存器583之資料由於不存在藉由偏移 而丟棄之資料,因此精度提升。 於圖40表示輸入資料由最小轉移到最大時之亮燈率之變 化。若以之前所述之方式使亮燈率變化,則亮燈率將描繪 曲線而變化。然而此時,於術所示區域,由於超過電源容 量的界限值’因此唯恐破壞電源。因此’如圖41所示,提 案在亮燈率增加及減少日夺’改變變化之方法。於亮燈率低 =區域,若使亮燈率大幅變化,將看似閃燦,但於亮燈率 兩之區域,即使大幅變化亮燈率,仍不致看似閃燦。 此係由於在亮燈率低之區域,收縮畫面内之黑顯示(非顯 示部)之比例較大所致。在原本黑顯示部之比例少之亮燈率 高之區域,即使大幅降低亮燈率,仍不會影響畫質。因此, 亮燈率在5〇%以上時,由輸入資料算出之γ、未滿5〇%之 94992-961016.doc -43 - 1295792 前述使變化速度和緩 區域時’不採用 率降低至5〇〇/。。 之驅動方法而使亮 燈 …、、而,電源容量之界限值比5〇%大 以按照其界限容旦 w 氐至50%而 限谷里之梵燈率抑制,宜為75 容量未滿叫即使將亮燈率降低至5。%= 源之界限容量,但由閃燦的觀點來看,不宜== 滿50%之亮燈率。 人降低到未 即使採用此方法,由於亮燈率係判斷輸入資料之後變 化’因此丄幀間可能會超過電源容量之界限值。例如:如圖 42所不,右輸入資料=有機£乙面板之影像之亮度資料,若累 顯示持續短暫時間’由於輸人資料小,因此亮燈率成為最 此若大然成為全面白顯示,該幀間將維持最大亮 燈率而成為全面白顯示。此時,流入有機EL面板之電流量 位於421所示區域,超過電源之界限容量。 為了避免此現象,有2種方法。一為電路内具有幀記憶 體。若使成為暫且於幀記憶體内儲存圖像資料,其後進行 ,、、、員示之構成的話’可在白顯示之前降低亮燈率。然而,若 電路内具有幀記憶體,會有電路規模變得甚大之的缺點。 因此’提案一種不使用幀記憶體而避免此現象之方法。 如圖43所示,在輸入閘極驅動器12之閘極信號線431加入信 號線432,將2個信號線以AND進行邏輯運算。藉此,信號 線432在HI(高)時,按照閘極信號線431,有機EL面板之電 晶體lid開啟/關閉,信號線432為low(低)時,不受限於閘 極信號線431,有機EL面板之電晶體lid關閉。 94992-961016.doc -44- 1295792 當然,在AND以外進行邏輯運算,改變2個信號線之組合 亦無問題。在此說明有關以AND進行邏輯運算,閘極信號 線丨7為LOW時,有機EL·面板之電晶體lld關閉之情況。首 先,由焭燈率計算輸入資料之界限值。假設亮燈率為i 〇〇% 的狀況,電源容量之界限值為50%之情況,輸入資料在5〇% 之時點為成為界限。亮燈率為7〇%的狀況,電源之界限容 I為50%時,輸入資料在71%之時點為成為界限。輸入資料 係於到達該界限值之時點,將信號線432降至LOW。 如此一來,閘極信號線17成為L〇w,有機EL面板之電晶 籲 體1 Id成為關閉。此時,於圖44表示顯示區域之變化。於 之時點,若到達界限值,信號線432成為L〇w,操作第一線 之電晶體lid之閘極信號線。“。成為乙〇冒,藉此,第一線 成為非亮燈狀態,此線持續非亮燈狀態,直到17a(1)成為 HI為止。第一線成為非亮燈狀態之後,於每1H,17b(2)、 17b(3)…依序成為L〇w,第二線、第三線…依序成為非亮 燈狀態。若以圖表示此狀況,成為441、442、443之順序, 各線之焭燈時間不變。故,即使在丨幀途中進行此處理,仍 _ 不會影響圖像。藉由此方法,可不使用幢記憶體,以不超 過電源之界限容量之方式抑制電流。 如圖19所示’本發明搭載之顯示器可藉由在1幀間亮燈之 顯不區域調整亮度。如圖13所示,若圖像顯示區域之水平 掃描線數設為S,於1幀間亮燈之顯示區域設為n,則顯示區 域之壳度為N/S。如先前記載,此方法之顯示區域亮度調整 係可藉由閑極驅動器電路12之偏移暫存器電路61等之控制 94992-961016.doc -45- 1295792 而容易實現。 然而’於此方法僅能以S階段調整顯示區域的亮度。於圖 3 1表示使冗燈之顯示區域之n變化之際之顯示區域之亮度 變化。由於以亮燈掃描線數>1之變化調整亮度,因此亮度變 化如圖一般,成為階梯狀。亮度之調整幅度小時,不構成 問題’但亮度之調整幅度大時,若採取此調整方法,使N 變化時之亮度變化變大,難以圓滑地變化亮度。 因此,如圖6所示,於閘極驅動器12内配置2條信號線 62a、62b,此2條信號線62a、62b係連接於連在偏移暫存器 之閘極控制用信號線64及OR電路65。OR電路65之輸出係於 連接在輸出緩衝器63之後,輸出至閘極信號線17。如圖28 所示,閘極信號線17僅於信號線62及64均成為[〇貿時,輪 出LOW,有任一為HI時,輸出HI。 藉此,藉由在電晶體11b、lid為開啟狀態(閘極信號線17 為L〇W輸出)時,將信號線62進行HI輸出,以便閘極信號線 17可進行HI輸出,將電晶體Ub、nd關閉。再者,本發明 不限於信號線與OR電路之組合,其係藉由變化信號線Μ, 以使閘極信號線17變化,因此亦得以AND電路、nand電 路、NOR電路取代〇R電路。 而且,如圖32所不,藉由調整信號線62b2HI輸出期間, 以便調整EL元件15之發光時間。若著眼於丨個£1^元件^之 情況,亮燈掃描線數為N時,於丨幀間,N水平掃描期間(h) 亮燈。此時,若1水平期間(111)内之信號線6213之出輸出期 間設為M(/〇,則1幢間之亮燈時間減少ΜχΝ(μ)。於圖%表 94992-961016.doc -46 - 1295792 不此時之冗度變化。N=N〆與Ν=ΝΊ (匕間之亮 度係以斜率·ΜΧ『表現,藉此,圖31之階梯狀亮度變化可 線性地變化。 於此圖係描緣信號線62b在1Η進行1次出輸出,但本發明 不限於此亦可寺慮信號線62b在每數Η期間一次變成HI之 處理方法,而且HI輸出期間配置於m内之任何場所均不構 成問題。又,亦可於數幀間調整亮度,舉例的話,若每2 鴨將信號線62b進行輸出,則m輸出之期間m看似成 為1/2,但進行此處理時,若僅於特定顯示期間將信號線㈣ 進订HI輸出的話,圖像顯示區域可能出現亮度不均。 於此情況,藉由歷經數幀間進行處理,可消除亮度不均。 例如如圖3 5所不,於每丨幀將於奇數線之亮燈時使信號線 62b成為HI之顯示方法351&及於偶數線之亮燈時使信號線 62b成為HI之顯示方法351b切換之方法。藉此消除觀感上之 顯示區域之亮度不均。於本發明,顯示區域之水平掃描線 數有S條,其中N條倒置時,僅於N/s^ 1/4之情況,操作信 號線62,調整亮度。首先說明有關N/s在1/4以下時,操作 信號線62之優點。 如先A所描述,若以亮燈水平掃描線數N之變化調整亮 度,由於亮度變化成為階梯狀,因此在^^變化的邊界,亮度 大幅變化。顯示區域之亮度大時,人的視覺難以發現變化 大小,但顯示區域之亮度變化小時容易發現。因此,於本 發明,藉由在顯示區域之亮度變化小時調整信號線62,可 將亮度之變化量進行微調整。 94992-961016.doc -47· 1295792 其次,說明有關_在1/4以上時之問題點。如圖9所示, 於源極信號線18及閘極信號線m之間存在浮游電容Μ。若 使信號線62b成為HI輸出,_間極信號線⑺將同時進= HI輸出,因此如圖36所示,由於源極信號線職閘極信号: 線17b之耦合,源極信號線18變化。由於此耦合,無法於儲 存電容19寫入正確之電壓。特別是 、 竹〜疋如圖37所不,由於低電 流,於寫入之低灰度部,無法藉由輕合而補正寫入電壓之 變化二如37卜般寫人電壓便壓變高時,低灰度部變得比目 的之亮度373高,如372-般寫人電壓便低時,低灰度部變 得比目的之亮度373低。 根據以上,作為具有可微調亮度之變&,並且由於耗合 所造成寫入電壓變化之影響少的期間,n/s^i/4為適當。 關於上述驅動方法,於圖6〇表示電路構成。上述驅動係 於60 1進行。上述驅動為了追求更細緻之亮燈率控制值,由 552c輸出1〇位元之資料,做成亮燈率控制值556。若由⑺位 凡之貧料做成亮燈率控制值556,可做成1〇24階段之資料, 能以8位元所做成之亮燈率控制值556時之4倍細緻進行控 制。然而,亮燈率只能在水平掃描線數s階段進行調整,因 此S若為8位元之值,將產生之1〇位元之控制資料之低位2 位兀用於亮燈率之微調。或者如前述圖61所示進行驅動 時,亦可於輸出之際,將朝LSB側偏移之n位元分之資料用 於亮燈率之微調。 由於本驅動係於亮燈率為N/S S 1 /4之期間進行,因此於 555至601之間,將亮燈率控制值556輸入。601係於亮燈率 94992-961016.doc -48- 1295792 為N/S= 1/4時進行驅動。如先前 斤 由601輪出之信號線 π係興攸閘極驅動器n所輸 曾,盆趴山二、* <仏號線64b進行邏輯運 ^ ,、輸出成為閘極信號線1 7b。闵+ , 屮灿、w ^ 因此,在信號線02b之輸 出狀況,可#作全像素之電晶體Also, the input data should be between the minimum and maximum, and the engraving of 2 to the 11th power. If you are completely black, if it is 〇, the full white light is 256 (2 to the 8th power). In order to calculate the change in the lighting rate, in order to obtain the amount of change, it is necessary to use the light input: divide by the maximum lighting rate and the minimum lighting rate. In the semiconductor design, the circuit of the input and subtraction circuit is extremely large in the circuit configuration. If the overall white display is 2 nth power, the slope is only to make the difference between the maximum lighting rate and the minimum = lamp rate 2 The number is offset by 8 bits, so if it is considered from the viewpoint of semiconductor design, it is not necessary to be incorporated into the circuit, and the circuit design becomes very easy. As in the case of 291, when the maximum light-emitting rate is maintained for a certain period of time and the waveform of the party light rate is gradually reduced, the light-emitting rate of the maximum of the input data as shown in Fig. 3() is: The maximum waveform is a straight line with a point U. If the slope is X, the slope is only 2χ during the period from 2 to 人, so that it can be compared with the linear ice phase X # & With this configuration, only the slope of the straight line type is obtained, and the curve of the line type is lowered, and the page is re-evaluated by the gradient of the line, and the circuit gauge is not increased: Made into a variety of broken line curves. This has the advantage of making the circuit scale smaller in circuit design. Private 94992-9610l6.doc -38 - 1295792 Next, in Figure 55, explain why?目士邮心 ^ Bureau ί realizes the circuit structure of this driver. First, the color data of the job source is initially input into the 551. The same data is input to the source driver 14 via image processing such as r processing. Rgb color information, but not limited to jobs. It is also possible to consider YUVI = temperature data or brightness data obtained by the aforementioned thermistor or photo sensor. After expanding the data in 551, the data is entered into the module w for collecting data. The information expansion on (5) will be described later. At 552, the data is first input to the adder 552a, but in the case where the data does not come often, it may be an indefinite material other than the image data. Therefore, the adder can decide whether to add or not by the enable signal (DE) and the clock (CLK) of whether the data arrives. However, in order to feed the circuit in which the image material* is input in advance, an enable signal is not required. The added data is stored in the 55 hole of the scratchpad, and is latched by the vertical sync signal (VD) at the "仏", and the upper 8 bits of the data of the register (2 digits) are output. The size of the register is not specified. The larger the size of the register, the larger the circuit scale, but the accuracy of the added data is improved. Moreover, the output data is not fixed at 8 bits. When the brightness rate control is to be performed in a finer range, the output data is 9 bits. Above the yuan, if the accuracy is not necessary, it is no problem under 7 bits. The maximum value of the output value is the scale of the input data. When the maximum value of the output 8-bit is 100, the input data is judged by 100 division. In order to reduce the circuit scale, the input data should be engraved by 2 η power. Therefore, in 551, in order to easily divide the data obtained between 1F into 255 equal parts, data expansion is performed. In the case where the output value is at most 1 〇〇, the input data itself is input at 2 55 times in 551, and the maximum value of the output value can be 255 (if 〇 is included, there are 256 (2 to 8 powers)) 94992-961016.doc -39- 1295792 The value of the output octet is input to the module 555 for calculating the lighting rate. The value input at 555 is calculated and output as the lighting rate control value 556. The lighting rate control value 556 is input to the gate control area. Block 553 'gate control block 553 is initialized in synchronization with VD and has a counter 554 that is up by the horizontal sync signal (hd). Figure 56 shows the gate with a light rate control value of 556 of 15. The time of the pole control block 553. When the counter 554 is 0, STwm (high) (turns on the switching transistor lib, 11c). The claw system controls the start pulse of the gate signal line m, and the switch is turned on/off by 17a. Crystals 11b, Uc. Further, when the counter 554 is 1, ST4L0W (low), and ST2 is HI. ST2 is used to control the start pulse of the gate signal line 17b, and the switch transistor 13 is turned on/off by 17b. The length of the HI period of ST2 is directly related to the illumination time of the organic component 1]. Therefore, when the value of the illumination rate control signal is the same as the value of the counter 554, if the ST2 becomes LOW, the illumination rate control signal can be used. Value adjustment organic £1^ The amount of illumination of the piece 15. The lighting rate control 556 is, the lighting rate is 1/255, so the amount of light is 1/255. Thereby the brightness can be controlled. The counter value of making ST1 and 2 HI is not fixed at 〇, i, and may take into account the delay of image data. In Fig. 55, the lighting rate control signal has an 8-bit value, as shown in Fig. 57, the lighting rate control signal is the i-bit of the HI period having the lighting rate inside the 552. The signal line of the element. In the case of Fig. 57, the signal line of the ST2 and the lighting rate control signal line can be logically operated to control the lighting time. Further, the switching transistors 丨 lb, 11 c, 11 d ' constructed as end-view pixels also have the logic of inverting the gate signal lines. Next, a method of delaying the illumination rate of 94992-961016.doc -40 - 1295792 at the time of driving the present invention is proposed. As shown in Fig. 38, if the input data is greatly degraded for the time axis 〇' 1' 2'), the lighting rate will vary greatly. If this becomes the case, the redundancy within the face will change frequently and cause flashing. Therefore, the difference between the current lighting rate and the lighting rate of the predetermined change of the secondary tape is shown in Fig. 39, so that the difference % is changed to ease the ratio of the change. If the expression is 'the luminous rate of time t is γ(1), and the light-free rate of the input data of time (1) is Y—(1), then Y(t + Ι)=γ(1)+ (γ - (t)- Y(1))/(4)G)...(5Wx) When the lighting rate is changed, if the difference in lighting rate is large, the amount of change becomes larger. The difference is small, and the amount of change becomes small. Therefore, if s is too large, the lighting rate changes. The required time becomes longer. ^ Figure 59 shows the relationship between the required light and the s when the lighting rate is moved from G to _. When the image is projected at a frequency of 60 Hz, the lighting rate is moved from 0% to 100%. s=32' requires about 200 buildings, so it takes about 3 seconds. If the time required for the change exceeds this, the brightness change does not seem smooth. Also, if the price is too small, it will not improve the flicker. In circuit design. Since the data is displayed in 2 digits, the calculation circuit requires a large amount of logic, which cannot be realized in reality. When the calculation is performed by the η power of 2, the left end of the data marked with 2 digits is taken as the 咼 position. If the right end is the lowest bit, as long as the η bit is shifted to the right, the same effect as the division is obtained, so the circuit configuration becomes very From the above point of view, s should be the second-order power. Figure 134 shows the change in the lighting rate from the full black display state to the white-white display state. The result of the review is s=2, the improvement effect Small, but when s = 4, the flash is improved. Moreover, if it exceeds s = 256, the change takes too much time, so the suppression function cannot be exerted. From the above, the present invention sets the range of s to 94092-961016.doc -41 - 1295792 256. Moreover, 32 is particularly preferable. Thereby, good display without flicker can be obtained. Furthermore, in addition to the circuit design, 3 is not limited to the nth power of 2. Further, the equation (5) is > (1) _ Υ (1)) / s numerator (γ (1)) becomes "times, the range of s is also r times. s is not always possible, but also in areas with high lighting rate, because sb is less, so s is less than Method 4. Therefore, it is also possible to change s in areas with high lighting rate and low areas. For example, when the lighting rate is above 5〇%, it should be controlled by 2 Ss$16, and the lighting rate is 5〇%. In the following, it should be controlled by 4gs^32. Also, if you want to change the lighting rate and increase the speed when changing the speed' It is also effective to change the s value by the magnitude relationship of Y (t) and Y (t). The circuit configuration of the driving method for delaying the change of the lighting rate is shown in Fig. 58 as follows, and the data output from 551 is added by the adder 5 52a. And the error is stored in the register 55. The value of the octet outputted by the operation module operation and the VD is synchronized, and the brightness control value (t) is derived, and γ / (1) is input to the subtraction module 582. In the module 582, the lighting rate control value γ(1) obtained by the register 583 holding the current lighting rate control value and the lighting rate control value γ derived from the current input data, (1) are subtracted. Two differences s(t) are produced. Next, 'S(t) performs the division processing in 584 by inputting the s value. As described above, since the arithmetic processing requires complicated logic, S(t) can be shifted by η bits toward the least significant bit (LSB) side by setting the input s value to the nth power of 2, thereby performing division. The S(t) system after the division and the current lighting rate t value Y(t)' held in the register 583 are added by the addition module 585. The value added at 585 becomes the luminance control value 556, which is input to the gate control block 553. Moreover, the lighting rate of 94992-961016.doc -42 - 1295792 is controlled by the input value to the temporary storage ^83 to be reflected in the secondary building. In the case of the method of J and the method of 58, when s(1) is shifted by n bits, only the offset is discarded, and there is a problem in accuracy. Specifically, in the case of Η, since n = 3 ′, the offset is 3 bits, but when s(1) is about the following value, if it is shifted by 3 bits toward the LSB side, it becomes 〇. As a method of avoiding, both s(1) and · are shifted by n bits in advance toward the most significant bit (10) B), and at the time of output, the output data is shifted by η bits toward the LSB side and rotated. Alternatively, as shown in Fig. 61, the initial value Υ(9) is shifted by η bits toward the deletion side and stored in the register M3. The data at the time when s(t) has been added is stored in the register 583, and the output data is shifted by n bits toward the LSB side and output. The S(1) added after the initial value is shifted to the listening side by η bits is the same as the offset by n bits toward the LSB side, and the data stored in the register 583 is discarded because there is no offset by the offset. Therefore, the accuracy is improved. Fig. 40 shows the change in the lighting rate when the input data is shifted from the minimum to the maximum. If the lighting rate is changed in the manner previously described, the lighting rate will change as a curve. However, at this time, in the area indicated by the operation, the power supply is exceeded because the limit value of the power supply capacity is exceeded. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 41, the method of changing the lighting rate and reducing the daily change is proposed. If the lighting rate is low = area, if the lighting rate changes greatly, it will appear to be flashing, but in the area of the lighting rate, even if the lighting rate is greatly changed, it will not appear to be flashing. This is due to the fact that the ratio of the black display (non-display portion) in the contraction screen is large in the region where the lighting rate is low. In areas where the ratio of the black display portion is small and the lighting rate is high, even if the lighting rate is greatly reduced, the image quality is not affected. Therefore, when the lighting rate is above 5〇%, the γ calculated from the input data and the less than 5〇% of 94992-961016.doc -43 - 1295792 are used to reduce the rate of non-use to 5〇〇. /. . The driving method is to turn on the light..., and the limit value of the power supply capacity is larger than 5〇% to suppress the van Gogh light rate in the limit according to the limit capacity w 氐 to 50%, preferably 75 capacity is not full Even reduce the lighting rate to 5. %= The limit capacity of the source, but from the point of view of flashing, it is not appropriate to == 50% of the lighting rate. If the method is lowered, the lighting rate is judged to change after the input data. Therefore, the limit value of the power supply capacity may be exceeded between frames. For example, as shown in Figure 42, the right input data = the brightness data of the image of the organic panel, if the display is continuous for a short time, 'because the input data is small, the lighting rate becomes the most comprehensive white display. This frame will maintain the maximum lighting rate and become a full white display. At this time, the amount of current flowing into the organic EL panel is located in the area indicated by 421, exceeding the limit capacity of the power source. In order to avoid this phenomenon, there are two methods. One is a frame memory inside the circuit. If the image data is stored in the frame memory for a while, and then the composition of the user, the user, and the member are displayed, the lighting rate can be lowered before the white display. However, if there is a frame memory in the circuit, there is a disadvantage that the circuit scale becomes large. Therefore, a method of avoiding this phenomenon without using frame memory is proposed. As shown in Fig. 43, a signal line 432 is applied to the gate signal line 431 of the input gate driver 12, and the two signal lines are logically operated by AND. Thereby, when the signal line 432 is at HI (high), according to the gate signal line 431, the transistor lid of the organic EL panel is turned on/off, and when the signal line 432 is low (low), it is not limited to the gate signal line 431. The transistor lid of the organic EL panel is turned off. 94992-961016.doc -44- 1295792 Of course, it is no problem to perform logical operations outside of AND and change the combination of two signal lines. Here, when the logic operation is performed by AND, and the gate signal line 丨7 is LOW, the transistor 11d of the organic EL panel is turned off. First, the threshold value of the input data is calculated from the xenon lamp rate. Assuming that the lighting rate is i 〇〇%, the limit value of the power supply capacity is 50%, and the input data is at the limit of 5〇%. When the lighting rate is 7〇%, the input data is 50%, and the input data is at the limit of 71%. The input data is at a point in time when the threshold value is reached, and the signal line 432 is lowered to LOW. As a result, the gate signal line 17 becomes L 〇 w, and the crystal crystal 1 Id of the organic EL panel is turned off. At this time, a change of the display area is shown in FIG. At this point, if the threshold value is reached, the signal line 432 becomes L〇w, and the gate signal line of the transistor lid of the first line is operated. "Become a sputum, whereby the first line becomes non-lighting, and the line continues to be non-lighting until 17a (1) becomes HI. After the first line becomes non-lighting, every 1H, 17b(2), 17b(3)... sequentially becomes L〇w, and the second line and the third line are sequentially turned off. If this is shown in the figure, the order is 441, 442, and 443, and the lines are The xenon time does not change. Therefore, even if this process is performed on the frame, the image will not be affected. By this method, the current can be suppressed without using the block memory so as not to exceed the limit capacity of the power supply. As shown in FIG. 19, the display of the present invention can adjust the brightness by displaying the area of illumination in one frame. As shown in FIG. 13, if the number of horizontal scanning lines of the image display area is set to S, it is bright between frames. When the display area of the lamp is set to n, the shell of the display area is N/S. As previously described, the brightness adjustment of the display area of the method can be controlled by the offset register circuit 61 of the idle driver circuit 12. 94992-961016.doc -45- 1295792 is easy to implement. However, this method can only be used in the S phase. The brightness of the entire display area is shown in Fig. 31. The brightness of the display area is changed when n of the display area of the redundant lamp is changed. Since the brightness is adjusted by the change of the number of scanning lines of light > 1, the brightness changes as shown in the figure. When the brightness is adjusted to a small extent, it does not pose a problem. However, when the adjustment range of the brightness is large, if the adjustment method is adopted, the brightness change when N is changed becomes large, and it is difficult to smoothly change the brightness. Therefore, as shown in FIG. As shown, two signal lines 62a and 62b are disposed in the gate driver 12, and the two signal lines 62a and 62b are connected to the gate control signal line 64 and the OR circuit 65 connected to the offset register. The output of the circuit 65 is connected to the output signal buffer 63 and output to the gate signal line 17. As shown in Fig. 28, the gate signal line 17 becomes only the signal lines 62 and 64. When any of them is HI, HI is output. Thereby, when the transistors 11b and lid are turned on (the gate signal line 17 is L〇W output), the signal line 62 is output to HI for the gate. The signal line 17 can perform HI output, turning off the transistors Ub, nd. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the combination of the signal line and the OR circuit, and the gate signal line 17 is changed by changing the signal line ,, so that the AND circuit, the nand circuit, and the NOR circuit are replaced by the 〇R circuit. As shown in Fig. 32, by adjusting the output period of the signal line 62b2HI, the illumination time of the EL element 15 is adjusted. If attention is paid to the case of a component, the number of illumination lines is N, and the frame is illuminated. During the N horizontal scanning period (h), the light is turned on. If the output period of the signal line 6213 in the horizontal period (111) is set to M (/〇, the lighting time between the two buildings is reduced ΜχΝ (μ ). In the figure % table 94992-961016.doc -46 - 1295792 does not change the redundancy at this time. N = N 〆 and Ν = ΝΊ (the brightness between turns is expressed by the slope ΜΧ ,, whereby the stepwise brightness change of Fig. 31 can be linearly changed. The drawing signal line 62b is once performed at 1 于此 in this figure. The output is output, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the processing signal line 62b may be turned into a HI processing method once every several Η periods, and any place disposed in the m during the HI output period does not pose a problem. If the brightness is adjusted between frames, for example, if the signal line 62b is output every 2 ducks, the period m of the m output seems to be 1/2. However, when this processing is performed, the signal line (four) is ordered only during the specific display period. In the case of HI output, uneven brightness may occur in the image display area. In this case, brightness unevenness can be eliminated by processing between several frames. For example, as shown in Fig. 3, the frame will be odd-numbered in each frame. When the light is turned on, the signal line 62b is displayed in the HI display method 351 & and the display method 351b in which the signal line 62b is turned into the HI when the even line is turned on. This eliminates the brightness unevenness in the display area on the look-and-feel. The present invention, the number of horizontal scanning lines of the display area In the case of S strips, in which N strips are inverted, the signal line 62 is operated to adjust the brightness only in the case of N/s^ 1/4. First, the advantages of operating the signal line 62 when N/s is 1/4 or less are explained. As described in A first, if the brightness is adjusted by the change of the number of scanning lines N of the lighting level, since the brightness changes to a step shape, the brightness greatly changes at the boundary of the change of the ^^. When the brightness of the display area is large, the human vision is hard to find. The magnitude of the change is small, but the change in the brightness of the display area is easy to find. Therefore, in the present invention, the amount of change in the brightness can be finely adjusted by adjusting the signal line 62 when the brightness of the display area changes little. 94992-961016.doc -47 · 1295792 Next, the problem of _ at 1/4 or more will be explained. As shown in Fig. 9, there is a floating capacitance Μ between the source signal line 18 and the gate signal line m. If the signal line 62b is made HI output The _ interpolar signal line (7) will simultaneously input = HI output, so as shown in Figure 36, due to the source signal line gate signal: the coupling of line 17b, the source signal line 18 changes. Due to this coupling, it cannot be stored. Capacitor 19 writes the correct voltage. Yes, bamboo ~ 疋 as shown in Figure 37, due to low current, in the low gradation part of the write, can not correct the change of the write voltage by light combination, such as the write voltage of the human voltage becomes high, The low gradation portion becomes higher than the target luminance 373, and when the 372-like write voltage is low, the low gradation portion becomes lower than the target luminance 373. According to the above, as the variable having the fine-tunable brightness & Further, n/s^i/4 is appropriate for a period in which the influence of the change in the write voltage is small due to the consumption. The above-described driving method is shown in Fig. 6A, and the driving is performed in 60. The above-described driving is performed. Pursuing a more detailed lighting rate control value, the 552c outputs 1 unit of data to make a lighting rate control value 556. If the lighting rate control value 556 is made by the (7) bit of the poor material, the data of the 1st and 24th stages can be made, and the brightness control value 556 of 8 bits can be finely controlled 4 times. However, the lighting rate can only be adjusted in the horizontal scanning line number s stage, so if S is the value of 8 bits, the lower 2 bits of the control data of 1 bit will be generated for the fine adjustment of the lighting rate. Alternatively, when driving as shown in Fig. 61 as described above, the n-bit data shifted toward the LSB side may be used for fine adjustment of the lighting rate at the time of output. Since the driving system is performed during the period in which the lighting rate is N/S S 1 /4, the lighting rate control value 556 is input between 555 and 601. The 601 series is driven at a light rate of 94992-961016.doc -48- 1295792 for N/S = 1/4. For example, the signal line of the previous jin is 601, and the 驱动 攸 攸 攸 攸 曾 曾 曾 曾 , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,闵+ , 屮 、, w ^ Therefore, in the output state of the signal line 02b, can be used as a full-pixel transistor

> W/1 _ Ud。於不進行驅動之N/S =1/4之區間,輸出於信號線62b 产 以使#唬線64b之輸出波 形反映於17b。 N/SS 1/4時,601係與HD同步驅 、 乂 ^勳,冋步者不限於HD。 亦可汉置為了驅動6 〇 1之專用传铁 ^ί\Λ y ^ 号用乜讀;。601係藉由輸入之微調 用信號602及時鐘(CLK),以在指 伯疋期間使電晶體1 Id關閉之 方式操作信號線62b。如先前所示’若在N線亮燈之狀況u 水平期間(1H)内之信號線㈣之出輸出期間設為μ⑻,則^ 幢間之亮燈時間減少MxN⑻。因此,藉由計算m時間及6〇2 之資料’算出Μ ’藉由62b之操作,進行減少亮燈時間之操 作,可圓滑地變化亮燈率。 圖60係於圖55附加601之型態,當然可適用於圖58或圖61 等本文記載之任何電路構成。 其次,思考於圖46所示之像素構成之主動矩陣型顯示裝 置,由源極信號線將特定電流值寫入像素之情況。從有關 源極驅動器1C 14之輸出段至像素為止之電流路徑之電路擷 取之電路係如圖45(a)。 按照灰度之電流I係由源極驅動器1C 14内,以電流源452 之形式,作為引入電流而流入。此電流經由源極信號線i 8 而取入於像素16内部,取入之電流流入驅動電晶體丨丨&。總 言之,於選擇之像素16,電流I係由EL電源線464,經由驅 94992-961016.doc -49- 1295792 動電晶體lla、源極信號線18,流入源極驅動器IC36。 若影像信號變化,電流源452之電流值變化,流入驅動電 晶體lla及源極信號線丨8之電流亦變化,屆時,源極信號線 之電壓按照驅動電晶體lla之電流-電壓特性而變化,驅動 電晶體lla之電流電壓特性為圖45(1))時,例如:電流源452 所流之電流值若由12變化成11,源極信號線之電壓將由V2 變化成vi。此電壓變化係藉由電流源452之電流引起。 於源極信號線18存在浮游電容45卜為了使源極信號線電 壓從V2變化成V卜必須拉出此浮游電容之電荷。此拉出所 花費的時間△ T為△ Q(浮游電容之電荷)=1(流入源極信號 線之電流)χΔ T=C(浮游電容值)χΔ v。在此,若△ v(由白顯 示時之黑顯示時間之信號線振幅)為5〔 v〕,c=1〇 pF、卜l〇 nA 的話,需要ΔΤ=50毫秒。此係比以6〇Hz之幀頻率驅動qcif +尺寸(像素數176x220)時之1水平掃描期間(75 μ秒)長,因 此假使欲在白顯示像素下之像素進行黑顯示,在源極信號 線電流變化途中,將電流寫入像素之開關電晶體⑴、川 將關閉,因此意味由於中間灰度記憶於記憶體,造 在白與黑之中間亮度發光。 ' 由於灰度越低,I值變得越小 之電荷’因此變化成特定亮度 題’越明顯出現於越低灰度顯 電流源4 5 2之電流為〇,不可能 451之電荷。 ’因此難以拉出浮游電容4 5 1 剞之信號寫入像素内部之問 示。極端來說,黑顯示時係 不流入電流而拉出浮游電容 因此, 為了解決此問題 於圖47所示之源極信號線18使 94992-961016.doc -50- 1295792 用η倍脈衝驅動,其係將通常之n倍電流施加通常之"η時間 者。藉由此驅動法,藉由寫入高於通常之電流,可縮短對 於電办器之寫入時間。若於源極信號線流入η倍電流,有機 ELtg件亦流入η倍電流,因此藉由使閘極控制信號成為ah 而輸出,TFTlld之導通時間成為1/n,以便將電流僅施加1/n 期間於有機EL元件15,使平均施加電流不變化。> W/1 _ Ud. In the interval of N/S = 1/4 in which no driving is performed, the output on the signal line 62b is such that the output waveform of the #唬 line 64b is reflected in 17b. When the N/SS is 1/4, the 601 series is synchronized with the HD, and the 冋 is not limited to HD. It can also be used by Han to drive 6 〇 1 dedicated transfer ^ί\Λ y ^ for reading; The 601 operates the signal line 62b by means of the input fine-tuning signal 602 and the clock (CLK) to turn off the transistor 1 Id during the finger period. As shown in the previous section, if the output period of the signal line (4) in the period of the N-line lighting period (1H) is set to μ (8), the lighting time between the buildings is reduced by MxN (8). Therefore, by calculating the data of m time and the data of 6〇2, the operation of 62b is performed to reduce the lighting time, and the lighting rate can be smoothly changed. Fig. 60 is a 601 type attached to Fig. 55, and can of course be applied to any of the circuit configurations described herein with reference to Fig. 58 or Fig. 61. Next, consider the case where the active matrix type display device constituted by the pixel shown in Fig. 46 writes a specific current value into the pixel from the source signal line. The circuit taken from the circuit of the current path of the source driver 1C 14 to the pixel is as shown in Fig. 45(a). The current I according to the gradation flows in the source driver 1C 14 as a current source 452 as an introduction current. This current is taken into the inside of the pixel 16 via the source signal line i 8 , and the current taken in flows into the driving transistor 丨丨 & In general, at the selected pixel 16, the current I flows from the EL power supply line 464 to the source driver IC 36 via the drive 94992-961016.doc -49-1295792, the transistor 111a, and the source signal line 18. If the image signal changes, the current value of the current source 452 changes, and the current flowing into the driving transistor 11a and the source signal line 亦8 also changes. At this time, the voltage of the source signal line changes according to the current-voltage characteristic of the driving transistor 11a. When the current-voltage characteristic of the driving transistor 11a is as shown in Fig. 45 (1), for example, if the current value of the current source 452 is changed from 12 to 11, the voltage of the source signal line is changed from V2 to vi. This voltage change is caused by the current of current source 452. The floating capacitor 45 exists in the source signal line 18. In order to change the source signal line voltage from V2 to V, the charge of the floating capacitor must be pulled out. The time Δ T taken for this pull-out is Δ Q (the charge of the floating capacitor) = 1 (the current flowing into the source signal line) χ Δ T = C (floating capacitance value) χ Δ v. Here, if Δ v (the amplitude of the signal line of the black display time when white is displayed) is 5 [v], c = 1 〇 pF, and 〇 l 〇 nA, Δ Τ = 50 msec is required. This is longer than 1 horizontal scanning period (75 μsec) when qcif + size (pixel number 176x220) is driven at a frame frequency of 6 Hz, so if the pixel to be displayed under the white display pixel is black, the source signal In the middle of the line current change, the switching transistor (1) that writes current into the pixel will turn off, which means that the intermediate gray level is stored in the memory, and the brightness is illuminated in the middle of white and black. The lower the gradation, the smaller the I value becomes, the more the charge becomes, the more the brightness becomes. The more pronounced the lower the gradation is, the lower the gradation is. The current of the current source 4 5 2 is 〇, and the charge of 451 is impossible. Therefore, it is difficult to pull out the problem that the signal of the floating capacitor 4 5 1 写入 is written inside the pixel. In the extreme case, the black display does not flow current and pulls out the floating capacitance. Therefore, in order to solve this problem, the source signal line 18 shown in FIG. 47 drives 94092-961016.doc -50 - 1295792 with n times pulse, which The usual n times current is applied to the usual "n time. By this driving method, the writing time to the electric device can be shortened by writing a current higher than usual. If the source signal line flows into the n-fold current, the organic ELtg device also flows into the n-fold current. Therefore, by turning the gate control signal into ah, the on-time of the TFT 11d becomes 1/n, so that the current is applied only 1/n. During the period of the organic EL element 15, the average applied current does not change.

若浮游電容451之大小設為c,源極信號線18之電壓設為 V,流入源極信號線18之電流設為I,則源極信號線18之電 流值變化所需時間4t=c. V/I,目此可將電流增大ι〇倍係 可將電流值變化所需時間縮點1〇分之i,而且表示即使源極 線之浮游電容451成為1G倍,仍可變化成特定電流值。因 此,為了將特定電流值寫入短暫的水平掃描期間内,增加 電流值係有效。 :使輸入電流成為1G倍,輸出電流亦成為⑺倍,由於 之梵度成為1G倍’因此為了獲得特定亮度,使圖1之TFTlld 之導通期間成為以往的八 ^ 旧10分之1,亮燈率成為10分之1,以If the size of the floating capacitor 451 is c, the voltage of the source signal line 18 is set to V, and the current flowing into the source signal line 18 is set to 1, the time required for the current value of the source signal line 18 to change is 4t=c. V/I, the current can be increased by ι times, the time required to change the current value is 1 缩, and it means that even if the floating capacitance 451 of the source line becomes 1G times, it can be changed to specific Current value. Therefore, in order to write a specific current value into a short horizontal scanning period, increasing the current value is effective. : The input current is 1G times, the output current is also (7) times, and the Brahman is 1G times. Therefore, in order to obtain a specific brightness, the ON period of the TFT 11d of FIG. 1 becomes one of the conventional ones, and the light is turned on. The rate is 1/10, to

便顯示特定亮度。 …、、、心口之為了充刀進行源極信號線丨8之浮游電容(寄生, 备)451之充放電’將特行電流值於像素之TFTlla進行奉 式必須由源極^號線18輸出較大之電流。然而,如此, 若將大的電流流入源極彳士 柽4唬線1 8,此電流值將被像素程^ 化,相對於特定電流之&丄_ ^之較大電流流入EL元件15。例如:宠 以10倍電流程式化,當 田然10倍電流流入EL元件15,EL元作 以1〇倍亮度發光。為了忐 成為特疋發光壳度,只要使流入E] 94992-961016.doc -51. 1295792 元件15之時間成為i/io即可。藉由如此驅動,可將源極信 號線18之寄生電容充分放電,並且可獲得特定之發光亮度\ 再者,將10倍電流值寫入像素之TFTlla(正確而言是設"定 電容器19之端子電壓),使EL元件15之開啟時間為1/1〇,但 此為一例。按照情況,亦可使10倍電流值寫入像素之 TFTlla,使EL元件15之開啟時間為1/5。相反地,亦有將⑺ 倍電流值寫入像素之TFT1 la,使EL元件15之開啟時間成為 2倍之情況。 … 若使用此N倍驅動,可增加流入源極信號線之電流量,因 此可解決變化成特定亮度前之信號寫入像素内部之問題。 例如··閘極信號線17b係以往導通期間為1F(電流程式時間 為〇時,通常程式時間為1H,EL顯示裝置之像素列數至少 在10列以上,因此即使是1F,誤差在1%以下),若 話,由變化最花時間之灰度0到灰度丨,源極電容只要有2〇 PF程度,就能以75//秒程度變化。此係表示若是2型程度之 EL顯示裝置’幀頻率能以6〇 hz驅動。 並且在大型之顯示裝置,浮游電容(源極電容)451變大 時,只要使源極電流成為1〇倍以上即可。一般而言,源極 電流值為N倍時,只要使閘極信號線17b(TFTlld)之導通期 間為1F/N即可。藉此,亦可適用於電視、監視器用之顯示 裝置等。 然而,N倍驅動即使以相同亮度表示,瞬間流入像素之電 流成為N倍,因此對於有機;£1^元件造成甚大負擔。 因此,提案採用本發明之按照輸入資料控制亮燈率之驅 94992-961016.doc -52- 1295792 法’於顯示圖像之低亮度部,控制亮燈率及流入源極 ^ &冰18之電机里,如圖49所示,僅於低亮度部進行N倍脈 ^驅動在匕驅動方法之優點在於,因前述電流量不足之問 題難以在高亮度部引起之故,藉由在高亮度部不進行對於 有機EL元件造成負擔❹倍脈衝驅動,僅於全體而言流入 像素之電〃,L夕之低凴度部進行N倍脈衝驅動,以便持續減輕 有枝EL元件之負擔,解決由於前述源極信號線之浮游電容 451,變化成特定亮度前之信號寫入像素内部之問題。 八體而σ,於低壳度部,使亮燈率成為1丨,按照其而 使總電流量成為目的值,將流人源極信號線之電流增加至 N2倍。此時,無須N1=N2,亦可能別^犯,當然亦可能m -N2。然而,本驅動之目的在於增加流入源極信號線“之 電流量,因此N2> :1。而且,並非必須下降亮燈率,視流入 有機EL面板之電流量對於所求之輸入資料之關係,亦可能 採取不改變亮燈率或抑制亮燈率上升的處理。 假设使輸入資料與亮燈率的關係如同圖5〇所示,考慮輸 入資料在30%未滿之區域,使亮燈率最大,在3〇%以上之區 域,以流入有機EL面板之電流不超過電池241之界限電容之 方式,逐漸降低売燈率之驅動。而且,於前述驅動時,在 輸入資料未滿30%之區域進行N倍脈衝驅動。即,在將相當 於進行白顯示之前述電流量以1 〇〇予以表現之情況,對於前 述特定電流量係以3 0以下予以表現的低電流區域之灰度, 若將Nl> 1 ’ N2> 0且N1-N2之正數設定為係數,將前述特 定電流量設定為w,將此時的電流值設定為Iorg,將發光期 94992-961016.doc -53- 1295792 間設定為Torg ’則取代前述電流量而施加滿足電流值為i〇rg χΝΙ且發光期間為Torgxl/N2之電流量。其中,此n倍脈衝與 通常驅動之切換點不固定在30%。然而,若考慮到壽命, 宜在30%以下之區域,具有與N倍脈衝之切換點。 在此,提案2種有關N倍脈衝驅動之作法。第一係如5 i i 一般,輸入資料在30%未滿之區域,使亮燈率為1/N,使流 入源極信號線之電流量成為N倍之方法。第二係如5 12 一 般,輸入資料由30%之狀態往〇%而逐漸降低亮燈率,相反 地逐漸增加流入源極信號線之電流量之方法。流入有機EL 面板之電流量均成為圖50之關係,但第一方法之輸入資料 在30%未滿之狀況下,亮燈率及電流值均固定即可,因此 具有極易做成電路之優點。然而,在輸入資料為3〇%之界 限,亮燈率及電流值同時大幅變化,因此亦具有在變化之 瞬間,看似閃爍的問題。 第二方法之輸入資料在30%未滿之狀況下,必須同時操 作亮燈率及電流值,因此具有電路做成複雜的問題。但此 方法可使壳燈率及電流值和緩變化,因此不具有閃爍等問 題點。並且,如之前所示,變化成特定亮度前之信號寫入 像素内部之問題,流入源極信號線之電流量越少越顯著出 現,因此因應輸入資料減少而增加流入源極信號線之電流 量係合理,而且對於有機£[元件之負擔亦變小。藉由此方 法,實現一種驅動方法,其係極力減少對於有機el元件之 負擔,並且解決變化成特定亮度前之信號寫入像素内部之 問題。 、口 94992-961016.doc -54- 1295792 於圖64,說明有關本驅動之電路構成。以522加算之影像 資料輸入於基準電流控制模組641,於641,按照輸入之資 料’以增減流入源極信號線i 8之電流量之方式,控制源極 驅動^§ 14。 以圖62、圖63說明源極驅動器14。如圖63所示,源極驅 動器14係按照基準電流629,將電流流入源極信號線18。進 一步說明基準電流629的話,於圖62,基準電流629係藉由 節點620之電位及電阻元件621之電阻值決定。並且節點62〇 之電位可藉由電壓調節部625、控制資料信號線628而變 化。總言之,若藉由641控制控制資料信號線628的話,可 在藉由電阻元件621之電阻值所決定之範圍内變化。 作為上述驅動法之適用例,以圖65表示在圖61之電路構 成附加上述驅動法之電路構成。輸入資料及亮燈率、基準 電流值之關係成為如同5 12時,區別為使基準電流變化之區 域513及不變化之區域514。以輸入資料位於513區域時,圖 65之X一 flag成為1,位於514之區域時,成為〇之方式構成。 又,相同地,該幀之亮燈率γ⑴位於513時,y—flag成為丄, 位於514時成為〇。亦即,y—flag成為“寺,成為使基準電流 變化之區域,於651,^^牦為“夺,按照556之資料,使基 準電壓之控制資料信號線628變化。65〇内係以y—fl牦及 X一flag之組合構成。y—flag及χ—flag均為〇時,由於都在 之區域内,因此Y (t)係與555以同樣程序設計即可。同樣 地’ y—flag及x—fiag均為1時,由於在513之區域内移動,基 準電流雖變化,但關於亮燈率之計算,與555相同之程序即 94992-961016.doc •55- 1295792 可。y—Hag及X 一flag為(0, 1)或(1,0)時係由513之區域正要移 往514之區域之狀態(或相反)。於513之區域,亮燈率及基準 電流值均變化,但以相乘始終成為一定之方式移動。換言 之,可說514之亮燈率與最大狀況(定義為d—μαΧ)相同。因 此,y—flag為0、X—flag為1之狀態,亦即由514之區域移往 513之區域時,丫、〇為〇一1^八又。相反地,若7—£1叫為1、 X一flag為0之狀態,亦即由5 13之區域移往5 14之區域時,可 視為由D一MAX朝向以555所導引之Y >⑴移動的話,藉由將 D-MAX輸入保持γ⑴之暫存器583,以與555相同之程序設 計Y > (t),可實現沒有突兀感之亮燈率變化。 又’ 5兒明有關與圖3 0之描繪亮燈率之曲線之方法併用之 電路構成。此驅動方法係藉由併用描繪如圖3〇之亮燈率之 曲線,可縮小電路規模。 如圖130所示,將輸入資料以2的s次方分割,進行N倍電流 值、1/N党燈率驅動’直到2的n次方之輸入資料為止。最大亮 燈率之值為a,通常之亮燈率抑制驅動之最小亮燈值為b,N倍 電流值、1/N亮燈率驅動之最小亮燈率之值為c,而且輸入資料 為〇,亦即最小值至2的n次方為止視為CASE1(個案丨),2的打次 方至2的(n+ 1)次方為止視為CASE2(個案2),2的(n+丨)次方至 2的S次方,亦即最大值為止視為CASE3(個案3)。又,準備僅 在CASE1時成為i之FLAG—A,及僅在CASE3時成為〇之 FLAG—B。藉此,CASE1 能以(FLAG一 A,FLAG 一 Β)==(ι,u表示, CASE2 能以(FLAG A,FLAG—B)=(〇, 表示,case3 能以 (FLAG一A,FLAG—B)=(〇, 0)表示。接著,以圖Π1表示實現此 94992-961016.doc -56- 1295792 •驅動之電路構成。FLAG一 A及FLAG 一 B之值之辨別可藉由以 偏移暫存器偏移輸入資料並輸入比較器而得知。已偏移n 位元之資料若是〇, ,其以外為〇,並且使偏移丄 位兀(合計n+ 1位元),若為〇,FLAG一B為1,其以外為〇。 再者’?1^〇一八及卩1^〇一:6之0及1相反亦可。利用此2個曲 線’由CASE1做成滿足3的電路。 右免燈率為Y、資料為X(最大2的S次方),3個算式可表示 如其次。 CASE1 ··· Y=((a-c)/2n) · X + c CASE2…Y=a_2· ((a_b)/2s)· χ+2η· ((a仰π])) CASE3 …Y=a_((a_b)/2S) · χ 為了實現此3算式,只要在分別之情況進行運算即可,但於 電路構成上,由於運算處理係電路規模變大,宜儘可能減 進行運算的次數’特別是乘算處理會對於電路規模造成 甚大的負擔’因此藉由多用選擇器電路及偏移暫存器,以 實現負擔少的電路構成。 首先,分別進行a-b、a-c,將該值乘於選擇器13ιι。由上 式可知,僅於CASE1之情況進行a_c,因此FLAG一八為i時輸 出a-c,〇時輸出a_b。進行選擇器1311之輸出值與輸入資料 X之運算。藉此,完成(a_b)· X之值及(a-c)· X之值。於CASE2 及CASE3,斜率為2倍,因此將選擇器1311之輸出值之原樣 及2倍者,根據FLAG—B之值,在選擇器丨32丨2選擇。此時, 作為2倍的方法有將選擇器丨3丨丨之輸出值朝MSB側偏移丨位 兀之方法,以及即使不使用偏移暫存器,由於2個均除以 94992-961016.doc -57- 1295792 2s,因此只要將削掉選擇器13 11之輸出值之低位S位元者及 削掉S-1位元者,乘於選擇器π 12即可。a及選擇器13 12之 輸出之減算結果與CASE3之Y值一致。CASE2係於此運算結 果加上2n · ((3-1))/2(^1))者。又,CASE1可視為於c加上 ((a-c)/2n) · X ’因此藉由將此輸出值及c值乘於以FLAG_A 所選擇之選擇器1313,之後選擇加於選擇器1313之值,即 可求得亮燈率。2n · ((a-b)/〗^1))係將(0-13)/2(^1))朝MSB側 偏移η位元者。又,((a_c)/2n) · χ係將(a_c) · χ,亦即選擇 器13 11之輸出及輸入資料之運算值朝lsb侧偏移η位元者。 均偏移η位元,因此能以1個計數器i 3丨4結束偏移。 2n· 係將a_b值朝MSB側偏移η位元之後,將低 位S-1位元削掉而輸出。將此2個輸出乘於選擇器1315。此 選擇器為CASE1及CASE2之選擇器,因此使用FLAG—A。由 於CASE3無須加上此輸出,因此以FLAG一Β乘於選擇器 1316, CASE3之情況係輸出〇。藉此,藉由最小限度的運算 及選擇器,可算出所有CASE的亮燈率。 相較於由CASE1至3分別運算,此方式之電路規模成為丄 半以下,實現此構成之效果極高。 一般而言,圖像係使用伽瑪曲線。所謂伽瑪曲線,其係 藉由抑制低灰度部,以便全體呈現對比感之圖像處理。然 而,若藉由伽瑪曲線抑制低灰度部,低灰度部多之圖像將 變黑潰散,成為沒有深度感的圖像。雖是如此,但若不使 用伽瑪曲線,高灰度部多之圖像將成為未呈現出對 圖像。 " 94992-961016.doc -58- 1295792 進行本發明之亮燈率控制驅動之情況,若於顯示區域低 灰度顯示多時,藉由提高亮燈率以使全體變亮。此時,若 藉由伽瑪曲線使低灰度部潰散,由於顯示之像素與未顯示 之像素之亮度差變大,因此可能變成沒有深度的圖像。又, 於顯示區域高灰度顯示多時,由於降低亮燈率,顯示像素 與非顯示像素之亮度差變小。因此,若不以伽瑪曲線使圖 像潰散’將成為沒有對比感的圖像。 因此’提案一種與本發明之電流量控制驅動連動,藉由 顯示區域之變化而控制伽瑪曲線之驅動方法。 以圖67、68說明有關實現r曲線之電路構成。將輸入之 顏色資料取做曲線之橫軸,以2的η次方分割。於圖67係8 分割,分別為671a、67 lb…671f。而且,輸入對應於67 ia〜f 之邊界之r曲線之值672a〜f。於圖68係假定輸入之顏色資 料為8位元而進行處理。最初,於681判定輸入資料680之高 位3位元。由於將伽瑪曲線(2的3次方)進行8分割,因此藉由 680之高位3位元之值,可判斷輸入資料680位於67la〜f之哪 一區域。假設680位於671c之區域。671c之區域係伽瑪曲線 之值最低為672b、最高為672c,由於將256階段之輸入資料 8分割’因此1區間分成3 2階段。故,6 71 c之曲線斜率為 (672b_672c)/32。由於輸入資料位於671c之區域之哪一區域 係與680之低位5位元之值相等,因此將(680之低位5位元)χ (672b-672c)之值朝LSB側偏移5位元(以32除算),及成為 671c内之增加部分。亦即,於上述加上672b之值,成為輸 入資料680藉由伽瑪曲線轉換後之輸出值682。 94992-961016.doc -59- 1295792 接著,以圖66、圖69說明有關採用在552内所做之表示有 機EL面板之顯示狀態等之資料557,按照顯示狀態調整γ曲 線之電路構成。首先,於691決定為了做成2種τ曲線之值 661&〜66111、662&〜66211。在此,成立661- 662。由於7曲 線視使用之裝置而不同,因此此值應可由外部設定。而且, 取得661a〜f及662a〜f之各差663a〜f。其後,由691對於692 輸出661 a〜f及663a〜f。於692亦輸入552所輸出之顯示狀態之 資料557。於692,按照557,決定7曲線之值。557越大, 圖像之尚灰度越多,必須緊縮伽瑪曲線,於圖像添加強弱, 557越小,圖像之低灰度部越多,必須放鬆伽瑪曲線,製作 具有深度的影像。由於557為0〜255的資料,因此藉由 (661&〜£之資料)-{(663&〜£之資料)父(557之資料/255)}的運 算’做成按照557之伽瑪資料693a〜f。將此伽瑪資料693a〜f 輸入683。683係如圖68所說明,其係輸出由輸入之顏色資 料680,藉由根據672a〜f之資料所做成之伽瑪曲線所轉換之 資料之模組。於672a〜f輸入693a〜f,輸入之RGB之資料的5 係由藉由693a〜f所做成之伽瑪曲線轉換,並作為輸出696而 輸入於源極驅動器14。 於上述說明係採用從和緩之伽瑪曲線661減算對應於557 之資料之說法,但當然亦可採取由緊縮之伽瑪曲線662加算 對應於557之資料之說法。 又,伽瑪曲線不限於由2種做成。亦可採用由複數伽瑪曲 線,做成配和顯示影像之伽瑪曲線之構造。 伽瑪曲線之變化亦與亮燈率之變化一樣,具有若頻繁地 94992-961016.doc •60- 1295792 變化,將看似閃爍的問題。因此,與藉由612使亮燈率變化 延遲一樣,557亦藉由612而使變化速度非常有效地延遲。 於圖中,RGB係於694同樣地處理,但藉由RGB分別進 行,亦可做成RGB個別之伽瑪曲線。 措由以上驅動’於顯不區域低灰度部多之情況,藉由和 緩伽瑪曲線,以呈現深度感,高灰度部多之情況,藉由緊 縮伽瑪曲線,可呈現對比感而進行驅動。 又’作為將RGB獨立而做成伽瑪曲線之手段,在如圖i29 所示所做成之伽瑪曲線672,分別於rgb加上補正值 1291 a〜1291 f ’可將RGB分別製作伽瑪曲線。此方式係複雜 之伽瑪曲線之運算以1種即完成,因此可不增大電路規模而 實現。 由於有機EL元件15會劣化,若僅顯示固定圖案的話,僅 一部分像素之有機EL元件15劣化’顯示之圖案可能留下殘 影。為了防止殘影,必須辨別影像是否為靜止圖像。 作為辨別靜止圖像的方法,首先有内_記_,將^ 期間之資料全部記憶於幀記憶體,以便判斷與次幀之影像 資料之正否,判斷是否為靜止圖像之方法。此方法具 確實認識影像資料之不同的優點,但 八可 A門建幀記憶體, 因此電路規模變得極大。 用幀記憶體而判斷是 ,有利用加算1F期間 。影像不變時,影像 。因此,加算1F内之 因此’提案一種如圖71所示之不使 否為靜止圖像之方法。作為判斷方法 之全像素之資料之合計值判斷的方法 資料亦不變,因此資料之總和量不變 94992-961 〇 16.doc -61- 1295792 所有資料並比較,可檢測是否為靜止圖像。若採用此方法, 相較於將所有影像資料原樣記憶,能以非常小的電路規模 實現。然而在特定圖案,取得資料總和量的方法有不能發 揮效果的情況。例如··在黑晝面中有白區塊飛旋的情況, 即使白區塊的位置不同,作為資料的總和量相同,因此誤 認為靜止圖像。因此,本發明提案一種藉由組合數個像素 而做成資料,以便具有與其他像素之資料之相關關係的方 法。 首先’ 711係藉由資料致能(DE)及時鐘而動作。此 係為了資料不是經常會來,僅針對必要資料進行判定者。 如圖70所示,輸入6位元之影像資料7〇la、7〇lb時,準備 8位元之暫存器7〇2,於奇數及偶數位元輸入分別之影像資 料之高位4位元,構成暫存器。此時,暫存器7〇2不需為 8位το,電路規模雖變大,但亦可具有12位元之暫存器,若 可接党精度降低的話,未滿8位元之暫存器構成亦可。又, 亦了改麦2個影像資料的比例。輸入8位元之暫存器時,亦 可為5位元來自7〇la、3位元來自7〇lb之比例。並且,輸入 暫存器之資料未必需由高位取得,選擇低位4位元輸入亦 可,按照計數器713之值而改變取得場所亦為有效手段。如 圖70所示,以2像素觀看時,7〇3的情況係任一方圖案之資 料均相同,但704之情況係資料變得不同,因此不會誤認為 靜止圖像。由於圖70及圖71係將驅動方法簡化說明,因此2 像素間雖具有相關關係,但此為3像素以上亦無妨。若以許 多像素進行圖70之方式,具有靜止圖像之檢測精度提升的 94992-961016.doc -62- 1295792 優點,但暫存器702的位元數變大,因此亦具有電路規模變 大的缺點。因此,如圖74所示,準備位元數不同之數種暫 存器’以複數像素保持相關關係的方法。 於712係加算以暫存器之資料及計數器713之值進行邏輯 運异之值。計數器713係藉由水平同步信號(HD)而重設,藉 由時鐘而正數之模組。因此,與表示顯示區域之水平方向 座標者相同,藉由邏輯運算此計數器及資料,可於資料附 加水平方向座標之權重。 於714,加算以1水平期間分之資料及計數器715之值進行鲁 邏輯運算之值。計數器715係藉由垂直同步信號(vd)而重 設,藉由HD而正數之模組。因此,與表示顯示區域之垂直 方向座標者相同’藉由邏輯運算此計數器及資料,可於資 料附加垂直方向座標之權重。 貝 藉由利用以上方式’可提升靜止圖像檢測之精度,然而 未必需要使用上述所有方法,上述方法係進一步提高精度 之方法,不使用上述所有方法,並非無法檢測靜止圖像。 藉由組合上述方法之形式,形成巾貞資料716 « 前巾貞之資料717及718進行比較。作為在718進行比較 法’2個資料未必需要相同,影像資料多少會有雜訊換入, 因此只要沒有完全無雜訊的資料,2個資料就不會相同。於 718’根據必要精度,決定2個資料的誤差範圍即可。作為 比較方法’除了有將2個資料減算,由運算結果判斷是 靜止圖像之方法以外,亦有於幀的開頭使前幀的資料m 反轉,輸入於_(暫存器m6,根據於1F間加算之㈣ 94992-961016.doc -63- 1295792 料716接近G的程度,騎 用加法器,_由板^ΓΓ。712、714^ 〇之程度判斷是否為靜止圖像之方法1用減法器,以接近 圖:圖I!而藉由加算顯示區域所有資料,判斷是否為靜止 像視顯示圖像之不同’亦可能有5〇%為靜止圖 數5|7H5iU為動畫之情況。因此,藉由計數器713及計 為,Κ円冑晝面分割成複數’判斷晝面内之某個範圍是否 為静^像而進行各種處理的方法亦有效。 —Γ 1 8判斷為靜止圖像時,將計數器719正數。相反 右判斷為動晝時,重設計數器719。總言之,計數器719 之值係靜止圖像持續的期間。 、,’先提案種利用此計數器719,為了減緩EL元件15 之劣化速度而降低亮燈率的方法。 在片數裔719成為某值之時點,操作信號線71〇1,此信號 、、、1係於ΗΙ時,強制控制亮燈率之信號線。於710内,準 備連接亮燈率控制值556及信號線71〇1之模組,信號線71〇1 為HI時,強制將亮燈率降低至現在的1/2而構成電路。此 時’亮燈率強制降低之值無須固定在1/2,視需要減少亮燈 率。為了減少亮燈率,有機EL元件15係發光量減少,可能 減緩哥命劣化的速度。當然,71〇1為]:〇界時,以使亮燈率 降低的方式進行控制亦無妨。 然而’即使以上述方法降低劣化速度,若長時間流入的 話’仍將引起殘影。因此,靜止圖像長時間持續時,必須 完全停止流入有機EL元件1 5之電流。因此,採用信號線 94992-961016.doc -64- 1295792 7102,強制操作信號線62b,強制關閉控制電流流入有機 元件之期間之開關元件,阻止電流流入有機el元件。信號 線62b係如先前所示,其係可將操作開關元件叫之間極^ 號線!7b,強制地固定於HI、L〇w之任一方之信號線,藉由 以信號線7102控制此,可於靜止圖像長時間持續之情況, 停止有機EL元件發光,因此可防止有機EL元件的殘影。 並且在利用有機EL元件之顯示裝置,可檢測靜止圖像係 具有好處。如上述所示,有機EL元件可進行間歇驅動,於 本發明亦藉由控制亮燈率控制值,以便控制亮燈率。於先 則所不,藉由在間歇驅動一次插入黑,可使影像之輪廊明 確,圖像變得非常良好。然而,一次插入黑具有缺點,插 入之黑區域變得越大,人的眼睛可追上黑插入,具有黑插 入將看似閃爍的問題。此主要是靜止圖像所常見之問題, 動畫的情況由於影像的變化,看不見黑插入的閃爍。若將 黑分割而插入,將改善此現象,但不能利用同時一次插入 黑而使輪廓明確的效果。 因此,提案一種有關如圖72所示,於動晝顯示時,進行 將黑一次插入之驅動方法,若檢測到靜止,藉由將黑分割 插入,以防止靜止圖像時之閃爍之驅動方法。 以圖73說明有關為了利用計數器554及亮燈率控制值將 黑分割而插入之電路構成。如先前所示,開關電晶體丨id係 藉由閘極信號線17b所控制,閘極信號線17b係藉由輸入於 閘極驅動器12之ST2所決定。如圖75所示,ST2若以m單位 重複開啟/關閉,開關電晶體ud將於各111重複開啟/關閉, 94992-961016.doc -65· 1295792 成為如722,分割黑而插入之圖像。因此,多數使用如73 i 之選擇器’實現黑的分割插入。 71 〇之電路構成首先最初注意計數器554之LSB,選擇器 73 1係於輸入值S為1時輸出B之值,於〇時輸出a之值。亦 即’若以73 la考慮的話,計數器554之LSB之值為1時,輸出 亮燈率控制值之MSB之值。計數器554之lsb為〇時,反映 73 ib之輸出值。73 lb係於自計數器554之低位開始第二位元 為1時,亮燈率控制值為8位元之情況,輸出第七位元之值, 成為重複第三位元、第四位元…之電路構成。計數器554 φ 之LSB係於每1H重複HI、LOW。亮燈率控制值為8位元時, 由於第八位元為1時在128以上,因此必須每211有1次成為 HI。亦即,若使計數器554之LSB成為選擇器之開關,於lsb 為1時,輸出壳燈率控制值之MSB之值的話,每2H有1次ST2 成為HI。LSB為〇時,出自HSI左方之之選擇器之信號值輸 出至ST2。而且,計數器554之乙沾為〇,由計數器之低 位第一位疋為1時,輸出亮燈率控制值之第七位元。總言 之儿文且率控制值之第七位元係每4H輸出1次。若同樣地持 _ 續下去,將成為亮燈率控制值之第六位元之值係每8H輸出i 人之型怨。藉由將此組合,可由黑一次插入轉換成黑分 割插入。 藉由將上述黑分割插入之電路構成,與包含先前所示之 鴨記憶體之方法在内之檢測靜止圖冑之電路方法組 一 σ在動旦時,進行將黑一次插入,使輪廓明確之驅動 方法在靜止畫,藉由將黑分割而插入,可實現防止一次 94992-961016.doc -66 - 1295792 插入所造成之閃爍之驅動。 作為拉出先4所示之源極信號線丨8之浮游電容451之手 段,有準備阻抗低之電壓源773,將電壓施加於源極信號線 1 8的方法。上述手法稱為預充電驅動。 於圖77表示預充電驅動之電路構成。於電路内設置電壓 源773及電壓施加手段775。電壓施加手段775若使開關 開啟,電壓源773將源極信號線18之浮游電容451充放電。 為了方便圖示,774係與源極驅動器14分開描繪,但774亦 可内建於源極驅動器14。若使成為可藉由電壓施加手段 775 ’選擇進行預充電之源極信號線18之電路構成,由於能 以像素單位調整預充電之開啟/關閉,因此可進行微細的設 定。 本發明係於上述電路構成使用靜止圖像檢測手段711,此 亦可採用幀記憶體等以取代711。相較於動畫,靜止圖像由 於先前所示浮游電容451所造成之圖像劣化較明顯。故,藉 由711檢測靜止圖像,藉由比較器772操作電壓施加手段 775 ’進行預充電,可防止靜止圖像時之圖像劣化。 如前述,於顯示動晝之情況,為了使輪廓明確,宜將專 一次插入,但除此之外,由驅動有機EL顯示裝置之閘極驅 動器電路之電力面來考量,亦一次插入黑較佳。 又,驅動EL顯示面板之閘極驅動器12係藉由利用時鐘 CLK2而將開始脈衝ST2動作之偏移暫存器61b,使各閘極作 號線1 7b動作。如78 1所示,一次插入黑時,於1幀期間,各 閘極信號線17只要各開啟及關閉1次即可。然而,如782, 94992-961016.doc -67- 1295792 將黑分割而插入之情況,閘極信號線17重複開啟及關閉。 因此,同時開啟、關閉複數信號線,具有閘極驅動器12的 耗電變大的問題點。 由以上觀點,有機EL顯示裝置通常宜一次插入黑,然而, 將黑1次插入之情況,在靜止圖像觀察到將黑一次插入所造 成之閃爍。因此,本發明搭載面板之顯示狀態之說明圖係 顯示靜止圖像或動作少之影像。於顯示靜止圖像或動作少 之影像之情況,需要有一次插入黑變化成分割插入之構 成,但若由一次插入黑變化成分割插入時,在切換瞬間看 似閃爍。關於此可想到2個理由。 第一理由可能是切換成分割插入時之一時亮度劣化, 如圖79所不,思考在p條水平掃描線内,s條水平掃描線 亮燈之情況。此時未亮燈、亦即黑的掃描線數為p-s(條), 將此2分割時,未亮燈之掃描線數各為(p_s)/2(條)。切換前 經常s條之掃描線亮燈的情況,但僅於切換瞬間,在s/2(條) 冗垃之後至(P-S)/2(條)之間,亮燈掃描線數成為§/2。此期 間,由於顯示區域之亮度成為s/2,因此雖只有1幀内發生 亮度減少,但其可能成為圖像劣化。 第二理由可能是黑的間隔急速變化。 若一次插入黑,作為圖像劣化的原因之一,可能是人的 眼睛無意識地追上插入黑。因此’由—次插入黑的狀態將 黑分割插入時,記憶圖像急速變化的間隔,感受到圖像劣 化。 本發明係提案-種解決以上2個問題點,沒有圖像劣化而 94992-961016.doc -68- 1295792 將黑的插入方法由一次插入變化成分割插入的方法。切換 時引起圖像劣化係如前述’由於亮度及黑的感覺急速變化 所致,因此如圖89所示,本發明係藉由歷經複數數幀間逐 漸分割黑間隔的方法,防止切換時之圖像劣化。圖8〇係表 示做出N水平掃描期間(以後水平掃描期間標示為h)分之間 隔,將凴燈水平掃描線數2分割時之亮度變化。在使s條水 平知描線亮燈的狀況下,若2分割之開始脈衝設之前段為 801,後段為802的話,8()1及8()2之亮燈水平掃描線數成為 (S 2 4、6…)。因此,前段之開始脈衝8〇1輸出至閘極 _ 信I線之後’於S/2W期間’ EL顯示面板亮燈之水平掃描 線數p為(S/2)-N條’其間之顯示面板亮度對於切換前為: { (p/S } Xl00(%)...(6) 圖81所不曲線係以曲線表示於圖79及圖,一次以 刀口時之冗度差。此分割時之亮度與圖像劣化甚為有關。 弋()之值為p S-N,因此如圖所示,由於8及^而變 化根據實測值,可解析式⑹之值若未滿75%,將引起圖 像的劣化。因此,於本發日月提案式⑷之值每成為75%以上_ 之Ν值,亦即根據式(6),N^s/4(其中Nd),加大黑的插 門隔之方去。式⑹之值若在75%以上,不會引起圖像劣 化仁右在8〇%以上,更可期待效果。最好在㈧%以上 S/10)即可。 然而,於本發明,若亮度未滿75%,如何變化均無妨。 於、圖79 ’ $ s條水平掃描線亮燈之㈣將亮燈水平掃描線數 2分割時,分割成s/2,但將此分割成8,條及s_s>條亦無 94992-961016.doc -69- 1295792 :(二<S)。又,-次分割的量不限於2分割,假設N=3, 右二出每1水平掃描期間 90%以上之”,,、 即使一次4分割仍可保持 儿又 此對於處理不造成影響。於圖82,使 、插入間隔一疋’因此控制亮燈間隔之後移到其次的分 f,直到黑的插人間隔相同的場所為止。然而,如圖83所 亦可先刀副之後,再調整黑的插入間隔。&,亮燈間 隔:致’圖像劣化的改善效果高,但未必需要一致。 料方法係逐漸加大黑的插人間隔之方式,但亦可採用 回 反而逐漸減少凴燈水平掃描線數之做法。若採用 W條亮燈的狀況分割成W條及N條,其次分割成S韻條 及2N條之方法党燈,亮度不會成為未滿列%,因此不致引 士儿度殳化所造成的圖像劣化。此方法應是由於引起圖像 7、的第理由之黑的插入間隔急速變化,因此發生圖像 劣化。然而如前述,亮度變化所造成之圖像劣化可解決, 因此具有效果。 於圖85表示實現本發明之驅動方法之電路構成圖。本發 明之電路構成包含:2個計數器電路851、852;加算值控制 電路855,其係控制由該2個計數器產生信號之電路853、⑽ 及該2個計數器之加算值者;及選擇器㈣,其係輸出由⑸ 輸出之輸出856及由854輸出之輸出857之任一者。 電路854係將由圖73所示之亮燈率控制值及計數器之w 之值分割並輸出波形之電路,重新構成為延遲較少之電 路。圖73之電路與854相同,使用任一均可。電路853係於 計數器851為0時,使輸出856成為HI。而且,於加算值控制 94992-961016.doc -70- 1295792 電路855内,產生由壳燈率控制值而使輸出856成為之 。十數值。TO燈率控制值為N位元,將輸入閘極驅動器12之開 始脈衝ST2分割成2的t次方時,在成為亮燈率控制值之高位 (N-t)位元之值之時點,使輸出856成為L〇w。又,計數器851 係設定為於(N-t)位元全部成為!之值時,初始化為〇。將此 計數器851初始化時,控制選擇器858,以便選擇來自電路 854之輸出857。 進行如上述之設定係為了容易構成電路。 π燈率控制值未必需為整除值,將開始脈衝分割成2的t -人方之際,壳燈率控制值無法整除時,分割後之開始脈衝 成為不同長度。控制長度不同之開始脈衝需要新的構成電 路’電路構成變得複雜。 因此,產生使用如上述電路構成之優點。將開始脈衝分 割成2的t次方時,由亮燈率控制值之低位開始t位元間之值 係將亮燈率控制值分割成2的t次方時之剩餘,藉由補全此 剩餘部分,可進行電路分割。在與電路854同等之圖73所示 之電路’於计數器8 5 2之南位t位元變化時,按照亮燈率控 制值之低位開始t位元間之資料輸出。計數器852之高位以立 元間變化時與計數器85 1之初始化係同步,因此藉由在計數 恭851之初始化時,以選擇器858選擇電路854之輸出857, 可補全剩餘部分,藉由補全而可分割開始脈衝。使用此電 路構成可縮小電路規模。 採用實際值,以圖86說明上述電路之處理流程。861為電 路853之輸出856,8 64為電路854之輸出857,8 63為計數器 94992-961016.doc -71 - 1295792 851之值,864為計數器852之值。亮燈率控制值具有3位元 之谷里’值為3,若以2進數標示則為011。將此2分割時, 成為t=i,因此以2進數標示將計數器851初拾化之值係為 11,亦即10進數之3,於電路853將輸出降到L〇w之值為Qi, 10進數為1。於電路853,計數器851為〇,輸出成為扪,若 為卜輸出成為LOW。於電路854,計數器852為2、4、6時, 輸出成為HI。電路854之選擇輸出857之期間為計數器851 初始化時’亦即计數器8 5 2為4時,因此若藉由上述電路構 成合成此2個輸出,將成為如同865,可確認能將開始脈衝2 分割。 接著,說明有關使用加算值控制裝置之逐漸變化黑的插 入間隔之電路構成。加算值控制裝置8 5 5係為了同時控制2 個計數器85卜852而使用。加算值控制裝置855係藉由按照 狀況,區別使用每1個加算之狀態、加算亮燈率控制值及波 形分割數或由黑插入之間隔所導出之值之狀態、及未加算 任何之狀態,以便控制黑的插入間隔。以圖87說明加算值 控制裝置之狀態變化。將計數器851初始化之值設為γ,輸 出856成為LOW之值設為X。8701為垂直同步信號,87〇2為 黑一次插入狀態之開始脈衝,8703係將前段之黑插入之間 隔8704作為N(H)時之狀態,8705係使前段之黑插入之間隔 8704及後段之黑插入8706之間隔大致成為相同間隔之狀 態。若由8703之狀態變化成8705之狀態,由於引起前述之 圖像劣化,因此於8703的狀態,將前段之黑插入間隔87〇4 逐漸加大為N、2N、3N…,最後成為8705的狀態,以防止 94992-961016.doc -72- 1295792 圖像劣化。根據圖87之曲線圖,說明有關8703之狀態之加 异值控制電路855的動作。8707所示之虛線為計數器851、 852各1假上升之情況之計數器之值之曲線。相對於其,以 實現表示之曲線8708係藉由加算值控制電路855控制計數 器851、852之增加值之計數器之值之曲線圖。加算值控制 電路855係1個1個增加計數器85ι、852而進行控制,以便計 數器851之值成為X為止。而且,計數器851在又時點,開始 脈衝成為LOW。原本,開始脈衝下一次成為出是計數器851 被初始化之Y時,其間有γ_χ(Η)期間。在此,加算值控制裝 置855係如8709所示,進行控制以加上值,直到計數器851、 852成為Υ-Ν之值為止。藉此,開始脈衝下一次成為出為止 之時間係縮短為Ν(Η)。在此,加算值控制裝置855係如 8710,將加算於計數器851、之值返回1。計數器851、 852係於N-l(H)之後,值達到γ。藉由87〇9之值的加算方式, 到達γ值為止之期間變化。8709之值對於計數器851係以非 同步加算時,到達Y值為止之期間可能成為N(H)。於本發 明,任何加上方式均可,因此,計數器851被初始化,選擇 輸出857之後,開始脈衝再度成為HI。藉此,前段之黑插入 之間隔8704成為N(H)。開始脈衝成為m之後,在χ(Η)後, 開始脈衝再度成為L0W。在此,加算值控制裝置855係如 8711所示,為了使计數器851、852之值與之值相等, 以使計數器851、852成為無加算狀態之方式進行控制。藉 由與加於8709之期間之值相同的期間持續無加算狀態,計 數器851、852與87G7之值相同。若計數器851、⑴之值與 94992-961016.doc -73- 1295792 8707相同,加算值控制裝置855將計數器851、852之值返回 1。於圖88表示由2分割變化成4分割時之計數器851 ' 852 之變化圖,於圖89表示當時之黑插入之間隔變化。根據圖 89,可知若使用上述驅動方法,可實現一種逐漸調整黑的 插入間隔之驅動方法,其係解決急速之亮度變化所造成之 圖像劣化及急速之黑之插入間隔變化所造成之圖像劣化之 問題者。 “本fx月係/、要疋藉由儲存電容丨9所程式化之電荷,開關 電晶體Iid開啟、關閉驅動電晶體1&或2711?所流之電流, 以便控制電流施加於有機EL元件15之期間之電路構成的 話,不限於圖1 ’在如圖27之電路構成亦可使用。又,用於 電路構成之TFT是p通道或N通道,均不影響本發明之驅動 方法。圖133所示之電路構成係以N通道構成,但亦可適用 於此構成。此外,源極驅動器14之構成不受影響。即使是 如圖90以直接電壓將儲存電容9〇1充電,並使驅動電晶體 9〇2驅動之電壓驅動式之電路,亦可使用本發明之驅動方 法。亦可使用於如圖76之採用一般稱為電流鏡之TFT之鏡比 例決定電流量之顯示器。 又,本驅動方式係藉由控制亮燈率,控制面板之電流值 之驅動方法’但如圖96所示’亦可採取為了控制亮燈率, 藉由將輸入閘極驅動器12之信號線ST2輸入961之模組,如 圖97所示,以使成為按照亮燈率之電流值之方式,控制源 極驅動H 14之電子量,以便調整源極信號㈣之電流,控 制面板電流量之方法。再者,962係適應本發明所記載之為 94992-961016.doc -74- 1295792A specific brightness is displayed. ...,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Larger current. However, if a large current flows into the source gentleman 柽4唬 line 1, the current value will be pixelized, and a larger current with respect to the specific current & 丄 _ ^ flows into the EL element 15. For example, the pet is programmed with a current of 10 times, and when 10 times of current flows into the EL element 15, the EL element emits light at a magnification of 1 time. In order to become a special light-emitting shell, it is sufficient to make the time of the element 15 flowing into E] 94992-961016.doc -51. 1295792 into i/io. By driving in this way, the parasitic capacitance of the source signal line 18 can be sufficiently discharged, and a specific luminance can be obtained. Further, 10 times the current value is written to the TFT 111a of the pixel (correctly, the capacitor is set to 19) The terminal voltage) makes the ON time of the EL element 15 1/1 〇, but this is an example. According to circumstances, it is also possible to write a current value of 10 times into the TFT 11a of the pixel so that the ON time of the EL element 15 is 1/5. Conversely, there is a case where the (7) times current value is written to the TFT1 la of the pixel, and the ON time of the EL element 15 is doubled. ... If this N-time drive is used, the amount of current flowing into the source signal line can be increased, so that the problem that the signal before the change to a specific brightness is written inside the pixel can be solved. For example, the gate signal line 17b is 1F in the conventional conduction period (when the current program time is ,, the normal program time is 1H, and the number of pixel columns in the EL display device is at least 10 columns or more. Therefore, even 1F, the error is 1%. The following), if it is changed from the most time-consuming grayscale 0 to grayscale 丨, the source capacitance can be changed by 75//2 as long as it has a level of 2 PF. This means that if the 2-type EL display device' frame frequency can be driven at 6 〇 hz. Further, in a large display device, when the floating capacitance (source capacitance) 451 becomes large, the source current can be made 1 time or more. In general, when the source current value is N times, the conduction period of the gate signal line 17b (TFT 11d) may be 1 F/N. Therefore, it can also be applied to a display device for televisions and monitors. However, even if the N-times drive is expressed by the same brightness, the current flowing into the pixel instantaneously becomes N times, which imposes a great burden on the organic component. Therefore, the proposal adopts the method of controlling the lighting rate according to the input data of the invention 94992-961016.doc -52-1295792 method to display the low brightness portion of the image, controlling the lighting rate and flowing into the source ^ & ice 18 In the motor, as shown in FIG. 49, the N-pulse driving is performed only in the low-luminance portion. The advantage of the 匕 driving method is that it is difficult to cause the high-luminance portion due to the shortage of the current amount, by high brightness. The part does not perform the burden on the organic EL element, and the pulse is driven by the pulse, and the power is supplied to the pixel only in the whole, and the low-pitched portion of the L-ray is N-pulse driven to continuously reduce the burden on the branched EL element. The floating capacitance 451 of the source signal line is changed to a problem that a signal before the specific luminance is written inside the pixel. In the case of the low-shell portion, the lighting rate is set to 1 丨, and the total current amount is set to the target value, and the current flowing through the source signal line is increased to N2 times. At this time, it is not necessary to have N1=N2, and it is also possible to make a crime. Of course, it may also be m-N2. However, the purpose of this driver is to increase the amount of current flowing into the source signal line, so N2>: 1. Moreover, it is not necessary to lower the lighting rate, depending on the relationship between the amount of current flowing into the organic EL panel and the input data sought. It is also possible to adopt a process that does not change the lighting rate or suppress the increase of the lighting rate. Assume that the relationship between the input data and the lighting rate is as shown in Fig. 5, considering that the input data is in the 30% under-filled area, so that the lighting rate is maximized. In the region of more than 3%, the driving of the xenon lamp rate is gradually reduced in such a manner that the current flowing into the organic EL panel does not exceed the limit capacitance of the battery 241. Moreover, in the above-mentioned driving, the input data is less than 30%. N-time pulse driving is performed. That is, when the current amount corresponding to the white display is expressed by 1 〇〇, the gradation of the low current region expressed by the specific current amount of 30 or less is Nl> 1 'N2> 0 and the positive number of N1-N2 is set as a coefficient, the specific current amount is set to w, and the current value at this time is set to Iorg, and the light-emitting period is 94092-961016.doc -53 - 1295792 In the case of Torg', the amount of current satisfying the current value i〇rg χΝΙ and the period of illumination is Torgxl/N2 is applied instead of the aforementioned current amount, wherein the switching point of the n-time pulse and the normal drive is not fixed at 30%. If the life is considered, it is better to have a switching point with N times the pulse in the area below 30%. Here, two kinds of N-pulse driving methods are proposed. The first system is 5 ii, and the input data is 30%. In the full area, the lighting rate is 1/N, and the current flowing into the source signal line is N times. The second system is 5 12, and the input data is gradually reduced from 30% to 〇%. The lamp rate, on the contrary, gradually increases the amount of current flowing into the source signal line. The amount of current flowing into the organic EL panel becomes the relationship of FIG. 50, but the input data of the first method is turned on under 30% of the full condition. Both the rate and the current value are fixed, so it has the advantage of being extremely easy to make a circuit. However, at the limit of the input data of 3〇%, the lighting rate and the current value are greatly changed at the same time, so it is also at the moment of change. Flashing problem. Loss of the second method When the data is less than 30%, the lighting rate and current value must be operated at the same time, so the circuit has complicated problems. However, this method can make the lamp light rate and current value change slowly, so there is no problem such as flicker. Moreover, as shown before, the problem that the signal before the change to the specific brightness is written inside the pixel, the smaller the amount of current flowing into the source signal line, the more significant, so the current flowing into the source signal line is increased in response to the decrease of the input data. The quantity is reasonable, and the burden on the component is also reduced. By this method, a driving method is implemented, which minimizes the burden on the organic EL element, and solves the problem of writing the signal into the pixel before changing to a specific brightness. The problem. Port 94992-961016.doc -54- 1295792 FIG. 64 illustrates the circuit configuration of the present drive. The image data added by 522 is input to the reference current control module 641, and at 641, the source driver 14 is controlled in accordance with the input data 'to increase or decrease the amount of current flowing into the source signal line i8. The source driver 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. As shown in Fig. 63, the source driver 14 flows a current into the source signal line 18 in accordance with the reference current 629. Further, when the reference current 629 is described, the reference current 629 is determined by the potential of the node 620 and the resistance value of the resistance element 621 in Fig. 62. Further, the potential of the node 62 可 can be changed by the voltage adjusting unit 625 and the control data signal line 628. In summary, if the control data signal line 628 is controlled by 641, it can be varied within the range determined by the resistance value of the resistance element 621. As an application example of the above-described driving method, a circuit configuration in which the above-described driving method is added to the circuit of Fig. 61 is shown in Fig. 65. The relationship between the input data and the lighting rate and the reference current value is as in the case of 5 12, and is distinguished by the region 513 in which the reference current changes and the region 514 in which the reference current does not change. When the input data is in the 513 area, the X-flag of Fig. 65 becomes 1, and when it is located in the area of 514, it becomes a structure of 〇. Further, similarly, when the lighting rate γ(1) of the frame is at 513, y_flag becomes 丄, and when it is 514, it becomes 〇. That is, y-flag becomes "the temple, which becomes the region where the reference current changes, and 651, ^^牦 is "taken, according to the information of 556, the reference data signal line 628 of the reference voltage is changed. The 65〇 is composed of a combination of y-fl牦 and X-flag. When y_flag and χ-flag are both ,, since Y is in the region, Y (t) is designed in the same program as 555. Similarly, when both 'y-flag and x-fiag are 1, the reference current changes due to the movement in the area of 513, but the calculation of the lighting rate is the same as the program of 555, 94092-961016.doc • 55- 1295792 Yes. When y-Hag and X-flag are (0, 1) or (1, 0), the state of the region of 513 is about to be moved to the region of 514 (or vice versa). In the area of 513, both the lighting rate and the reference current value change, but the multiplication always moves in a certain way. In other words, it can be said that the lighting rate of 514 is the same as the maximum condition (defined as d - μαΧ). Therefore, when y_flag is 0 and X_flag is 1, that is, when the area of 514 is moved to the area of 513, 丫 and 〇 are 11^8 again. Conversely, if 7-£1 is called 1, and X-flag is 0, that is, when the area of 5 13 is moved to the area of 5 14 , it can be regarded as D & Y toward Y gt guided by 555. (1) If it is moved, by setting the D-MAX input to the register 583 of γ(1), and designing Y > (t) in the same manner as 555, it is possible to realize a change in the lighting rate without a sudden sensation. In addition, the method of using the circuit for the curve of the lighting rate of Fig. 30 is used. This driving method can reduce the circuit scale by using the curve of the lighting rate as shown in Fig. 3 in combination. As shown in Fig. 130, the input data is divided by 2 s power, and the N-time current value and the 1/N party light rate are driven 'up to 2 n-th power input data. The value of the maximum lighting rate is a, the minimum lighting value of the usual lighting rate suppression driving is b, the value of the N times current value, the minimum lighting rate driven by the 1/N lighting rate is c, and the input data is 〇, that is, the minimum value of 2 to the nth power is regarded as CASE1 (case 丨), 2 is equal to 2 (n+ 1) power is considered as CASE2 (case 2), 2 (n+丨) The second power to the second power of S, which is the maximum value, is considered to be CASE3 (case 3). Further, FLAG_A which becomes i only at the time of CASE1 and FLAG_B which becomes 〇 at the time of CASE3 are prepared. By this, CASE1 can be (FLAG-A, FLAG a Β) == (ι, u, CASE2 can be (FLAG A, FLAG-B) = (〇, that, case3 can be (FLAG-A, FLAG- B) = (〇, 0) is indicated. Next, the circuit configuration of this driver is implemented as shown in Fig. 1. The discrimination between the values of FLAG-A and FLAG-B can be offset by The register offsets the input data and inputs it into the comparator. If the data of the offset n bits is 〇, otherwise, it is 〇, and the offset is clamped 兀 (total n + 1 bit), if 〇 FLAG-B is 1, and the other is 〇. In addition, '?1^〇一八和卩1^〇一: 6 of 0 and 1 may be reversed. Using these two curves 'made by CASE1 to satisfy 3 The right-free lamp rate is Y, the data is X (maximum 2 to the power of S), and the three equations can be expressed as follows. CASE1 ··· Y=((ac)/2n) · X + c CASE2...Y= A_2· ((a_b)/2s)· χ+2η· ((a ππ])) CASE3 ...Y=a_((a_b)/2S) · χ In order to realize the three equations, Yes, but in the circuit configuration, as the arithmetic processing system scale becomes larger, it should be reduced as much as possible. The number of row operations 'in particular, the multiplication processing imposes a large burden on the circuit scale. Therefore, the multi-purpose selector circuit and the offset register are used to realize a circuit configuration with less burden. First, ab and ac are respectively performed. This value is multiplied by the selector 13 ι. From the above equation, a_c is performed only in the case of CASE1, so ac is output when ac is eight, and a_b is output when 。 is output. The output value of the selector 1311 is calculated as the input data X. Thereby, the values of (a_b)·X and the values of (ac)·X are completed. In CASE2 and CASE3, the slope is doubled, so the output value of the selector 1311 is doubled and doubled, according to FLAG-B The value is selected in the selector 丨32丨2. At this time, as a method of doubled, there is a method of shifting the output value of the selector 丨丨3丨丨 toward the MSB side, and even if the offset register is not used. Since both are divided by 94992-961016.doc -57 - 1295792 2s, as long as the lower S bit of the output value of the selector 13 11 is cut off and the S-1 bit is cut off, the selector is multiplied. π 12 can be. The subtraction result of the output of a and selector 13 12 is consistent with the Y value of CASE3. CA SE2 is based on the result of this operation plus 2n · ((3-1))/2(^1)). Also, CASE1 can be regarded as c plus ((ac)/2n) · X ' so by this The output value and the c value are multiplied by the selector 1313 selected by FLAG_A, and then the value added to the selector 1313 is selected to obtain the lighting rate. 2n · ((a-b)/ 〗 〖1)) is to shift (0-13)/2(^1)) towards the MSB side by η bits. Further, ((a_c)/2n) · χ is (a_c) · χ, that is, the output of the selector 13 11 and the calculated value of the input data are shifted by η bits toward the lsb side. Both are offset by η bits, so the offset can be ended with one counter i 3丨4. 2n· After shifting the a_b value toward the MSB side by η bits, the lower S-1 bit is clipped and output. This two outputs are multiplied by the selector 1315. This selector is a selector for CASE1 and CASE2, so use FLAG-A. Since CASE3 does not need to add this output, FLAG is multiplied by selector 1316, and CASE3 is the output. Thereby, the lighting rate of all CASEs can be calculated by the minimum calculation and selector. Compared with the calculation by CASE1 to 3, the circuit scale of this mode is less than half, and the effect of realizing this configuration is extremely high. In general, images use a gamma curve. The so-called gamma curve is obtained by suppressing the low gradation portion so that the entire image is processed with contrast. However, if the low gradation portion is suppressed by the gamma curve, the image having a large number of gradation portions will be black and collapsed, and an image having no sense of depth will be obtained. However, if the gamma curve is not used, the image with more high gradation will not appear as the opposite image. " 94992-961016.doc -58- 1295792 In the case of performing the lighting rate control driving of the present invention, if the display area has a low gradation display, the lighting rate is increased to make the whole light. At this time, if the low gradation portion is broken by the gamma curve, since the luminance difference between the displayed pixel and the undisplayed pixel becomes large, it is possible to become an image having no depth. Further, when the display area has a high gradation display, the luminance difference between the display pixel and the non-display pixel is reduced because the lighting ratio is lowered. Therefore, if the image is not broken by the gamma curve, it will become an image with no contrast. Therefore, it is proposed to control the driving method of the gamma curve by the change of the display area in conjunction with the current amount control drive of the present invention. The circuit configuration for realizing the r-curve will be described with reference to Figs. The input color data is taken as the horizontal axis of the curve and divided by 2 η power. In Figure 67, there are 8 divisions, which are 671a, 67 lb...671f. Further, values 672a to f of the r-curve corresponding to the boundary of 67 ia to f are input. In Fig. 68, it is assumed that the input color data is 8-bit. Initially, the upper 3 bits of the input data 680 are determined at 681. Since the gamma curve (the third power of 2) is divided into eight, the value of the upper three bits of 680 can be used to determine which region of the input data 680 is located in 67la~f. Assume 680 is located in the area of 671c. The gamma curve of the 671c has a minimum value of 672b and a maximum of 672c. Since the input data of the 256th stage is divided into 8 divisions, the 1 interval is divided into 3 2 stages. Therefore, the slope of the curve of 6 71 c is (672b_672c)/32. Since the region of the input data located in the region of 671c is equal to the value of the lower 5 bits of 680, the value of (lower 5 bits) 672 (672b-672c) is shifted by 5 bits toward the LSB side ( Divided by 32), and become an increase in 671c. That is, the value of 672b is added to the above, and the output value 682 of the input data 680 is converted by the gamma curve. 94992-961016.doc -59- 1295792 Next, a circuit configuration 557 for indicating the display state of the organic EL panel and the like, which is performed in 552, and a circuit configuration for adjusting the gamma curve in accordance with the display state will be described with reference to Figs. First, at 691, the values of 661 & Here, 661-662 was established. Since the 7 curve varies depending on the device used, this value should be set externally. Further, the differences 663a to f of 661a to f and 662a to f are obtained. Thereafter, 691 a to f and 663a to f are outputted by 691 for 692. At 692, the data 557 of the display state outputted by 552 is also input. At 692, the value of the 7 curve is determined in accordance with 557. The larger the 557 is, the more the gray level of the image is. The gamma curve must be tightened, and the image is added with strong and weak. The smaller the 557 is, the more the low gray level part of the image is. The gamma curve must be relaxed to make the image with depth. . Since 557 is a data of 0 to 255, the gamma data according to 557 is made by the operation of (661 &~£)-{(663&~£) parent (557 data/255)} 693a~f. The gamma data 693a~f is input to 683. The 683 is as illustrated in Fig. 68, which outputs the color data 680 input by the gamma curve converted from the data of 672a~f. group. Inputs 693a to f at 672a to f, and 5 of the input RGB data are converted by the gamma curve made by 693a to f, and input to the source driver 14 as the output 696. In the above description, the data corresponding to the 557 is subtracted from the gentle gamma curve 661, but it is of course possible to add the data corresponding to the 557 by the condensed gamma curve 662. Further, the gamma curve is not limited to being made of two types. A structure in which a gamma curve of an image is displayed by a complex gamma curve can also be used. The change in the gamma curve is also the same as the change in the lighting rate. If there is a frequent change of 94992-961016.doc • 60-1295792, it will appear to be flickering. Therefore, as with the delay of the change in the illumination rate by 612, 557 also delays the rate of change very effectively by 612. In the figure, RGB is processed in the same manner as 694, but by RGB, it is also possible to make RGB individual gamma curves. In the case where the above-mentioned driving is used in the case where there are many low-gradation portions in the display region, by using the gentle gamma curve to present the sense of depth and the high gradation portion, the gamma curve can be tightened, and the contrast can be presented. drive. In addition, as a means of making RGB independent gamma curve, gamma curve 672 made as shown in i29, plus correction value 1291 a~1291 f ' in rgb, respectively, can be used to make gamma separately. curve. In this way, the operation of the complex gamma curve is completed in one type, so that it can be realized without increasing the circuit scale. Since the organic EL element 15 is deteriorated, if only the fixed pattern is displayed, only the organic EL element 15 of a part of the pixels deteriorates. The displayed pattern may leave a residual image. In order to prevent image sticking, it is necessary to discriminate whether the image is a still image. As a method of discriminating a still image, first, there is an internal _ _, and the data of the period of the period is all stored in the frame memory, so as to determine whether or not the image data of the sub-frame is positive or not, and whether or not it is a still image. This method has a clear understanding of the different advantages of image data, but the eight-gate A frame memory, so the circuit scale becomes enormous. It is judged by the frame memory that there is an increase in the 1F period. Image when the image is unchanged. Therefore, the addition of 1F is therefore proposed as a method of not making a still image as shown in FIG. The method of judging the total value of the data of the full pixel as the judgment method is also unchanged, so the total amount of the data is unchanged. 94992-961 〇 16.doc -61- 1295792 All the data are compared and can be detected as a still image. If this method is used, it can be realized with a very small circuit scale as compared with all the image data. However, in a specific pattern, the method of obtaining the total amount of data has a situation in which the effect cannot be exerted. For example, when there is a white block flying in the black box, even if the position of the white block is different, the total amount of the data is the same, so the still image is mistaken. Accordingly, the present invention proposes a method of making data by combining a plurality of pixels so as to have a correlation with data of other pixels. First, the '711 is operated by data enable (DE) and clock. This is because the information is not always coming, and only the judgement is made for the necessary information. As shown in FIG. 70, when inputting 6-bit image data 7〇la, 7〇lb, an 8-bit register 7〇2 is prepared, and the upper 4 bits of the respective image data are input to the odd and even bits. , constitute a register. At this time, the register 7〇2 does not need to be 8 bits το, although the circuit scale becomes larger, but it can also have a 12-bit scratchpad. If the accuracy of the party can be reduced, the temporary storage of less than 8 bits The composition of the device is also possible. In addition, the proportion of the two video materials was changed. When inputting an 8-bit scratchpad, it can also be 5 bits from 7〇la and 3 bits from 7〇lb. Moreover, the data input to the scratchpad does not have to be obtained from the upper position, and the lower 4-bit input may be selected. It is also an effective means to change the acquisition location according to the value of the counter 713. As shown in Fig. 70, when viewed in 2 pixels, the case of 7〇3 is the same for any one of the patterns, but in the case of 704, the data becomes different, so that the still image is not mistaken. Since FIGS. 70 and 71 simplify the description of the driving method, there is a correlation between the two pixels, but it is also possible to have three or more pixels. If the method of FIG. 70 is performed in a plurality of pixels, the advantage of the detection accuracy of the still image is improved 94492-961016.doc -62 - 1295792, but the number of bits of the register 702 becomes large, so that the circuit scale becomes large. Disadvantages. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 74, a method of maintaining a correlation between a plurality of types of registers different in the number of bits is prepared. The value of the logical difference is calculated by adding the data of the register and the value of the counter 713 to the 712 system. The counter 713 is reset by a horizontal synchronizing signal (HD), and is a module with a positive number by a clock. Therefore, the weight of the horizontal direction coordinate can be added to the data by logically calculating the counter and the data, as in the horizontal direction coordinate indicating the display area. At 714, the value of the data of the 1 level period and the value of the counter 715 are added to perform the value of the logic operation. Counter 715 is reset by a vertical sync signal (vd), a module that is positive by HD. Therefore, it is the same as the coordinate indicating the vertical direction of the display area. By logically calculating the counter and data, the weight of the vertical direction coordinates can be added to the data. By using the above method, the accuracy of still image detection can be improved. However, it is not necessary to use all of the above methods, and the above method is a method for further improving the accuracy. It is not impossible to detect a still image without using all the above methods. By combining the forms of the above methods, the information of the 716 716 716 « Front 贞 贞 717 and 718 are formed for comparison. As a comparison method at 718, the two data do not necessarily need to be the same, and the image data may be exchanged for noise. Therefore, as long as there is no data without noise, the two data will not be the same. At 718', the error range of the two data can be determined according to the necessary accuracy. As a comparison method, in addition to the method of subtracting two data and judging whether it is a still image by the calculation result, the data m of the previous frame is inverted at the beginning of the frame, and is input to _ (storage m6, according to Addition between 1F (4) 94992-961016.doc -63- 1295792 Material 716 is close to G, riding adder, _ by board ^ ΓΓ 712, 714 ^ 〇 degree to determine whether it is a still image method 1 subtraction In the vicinity of the figure: Figure I!, by adding all the data in the display area to determine whether it is a different image of the still image view, there may be a case where 5〇% is the number of still pictures 5|7H5iU is an animation. Therefore, It is also effective by the counter 713 and the method of dividing the face into plural numbers to determine whether or not a certain range in the face is a still image. Γ 1 8 when it is determined as a still image, When the counter 719 is positive, the counter 719 is reset. In short, the value of the counter 719 is a period during which the still image continues. A method of reducing the speed of light and reducing the lighting rate. When the number of people 719 becomes a certain value, the operation signal line 71〇1, when the signal, , and 1 are in the ΗΙ, forcibly control the signal line of the lighting rate. In 710, the connection brightness control value 556 is prepared and The module of the signal line 71〇1, when the signal line 71〇1 is HI, forcibly reduces the lighting rate to the current 1/2 to form a circuit. At this time, the value of the forced reduction of the lighting rate does not need to be fixed at 1/2. In order to reduce the lighting rate, the organic EL element 15 reduces the amount of light emitted, which may slow down the rate of deterioration of the life. Of course, 71〇1 is: when the boundary is used, the lighting rate is lowered. It is also possible to control the mode. However, even if the deterioration rate is lowered by the above method, if it flows in a long time, it will cause image sticking. Therefore, when the still image continues for a long time, the current flowing into the organic EL element 15 must be completely stopped. Therefore, the signal line 62b is forcibly operated by the signal line 94092-961016.doc -64-1295792 7102 to forcibly turn off the switching element during which the control current flows into the organic element, preventing current from flowing into the organic EL element. The signal line 62b is as previously indicated , its system The operation switching element is called the line ^7, forcibly fixed to the signal line of either of HI and L〇w, and by controlling the signal line 7102, the still image can be continued for a long time. Since the organic EL element emits light, the image sticking of the organic EL element can be prevented. Further, in the display device using the organic EL element, it is advantageous to detect the still image system. As described above, the organic EL element can be intermittently driven. The invention also controls the lighting rate control value to control the lighting rate. In the first place, by inserting black once in an intermittent manner, the image wheel gallery can be made clear and the image becomes very good. However, the insertion of black at one time has the disadvantage that the black area to be inserted becomes larger, the human eye can catch up with the black insertion, and the black insertion will appear to be flickering. This is mainly a problem common to still images. In the case of animation, the black insertion flicker is not visible due to the change of the image. Inserting black will improve this phenomenon, but you cannot use the effect of inserting black at the same time to make the outline clear. Therefore, there is proposed a driving method for preventing the flickering of a still image by inserting a black sub-segment when the static display is detected as shown in Fig. 72. A circuit configuration for inserting black in order to use the counter 554 and the lighting rate control value will be described with reference to FIG. As previously indicated, the switching transistor 丨id is controlled by the gate signal line 17b, and the gate signal line 17b is determined by the ST2 input to the gate driver 12. As shown in Fig. 75, if ST2 is repeatedly turned on/off in m units, the switching transistor ud will be turned on/off repeatedly for each 111, and 94992-961016.doc -65·1295792 becomes an image inserted as 722, which is divided into black. Therefore, most of the use of a selector such as 73 i implements black split insertion. 71 电路 Circuit configuration First, first pay attention to the LSB of the counter 554. The selector 73 1 outputs the value of B when the input value S is 1, and outputs the value of a when 〇. That is, if the value of the LSB of the counter 554 is 1 in consideration of 73 la, the value of the MSB of the lighting rate control value is output. When lsb of counter 554 is 〇, it reflects the output value of 73 ib. 73 lb is in the case where the second bit is 1 from the low position of the counter 554, and the lighting rate control value is 8 bits, and the value of the seventh bit is output, and the third bit and the fourth bit are repeated... The circuit is constructed. The LSB of the counter 554 φ is HI and LOW repeated every 1H. When the lighting rate control value is 8 bits, since the eighth bit is 1 or more, it is 128 or more. Therefore, it is necessary to have HI once every 211. That is, when the LSB of the counter 554 is set as the selector switch, when the value of the MSB of the case light rate control value is output when lsb is 1, the ST2 becomes HI once every 2H. When LSB is 〇, the signal value from the selector to the left of HSI is output to ST2. Moreover, the counter 554 is 〇, and when the first bit 疋 of the lower bit of the counter is 1, the seventh bit of the lighting rate control value is output. In the end, the seventh bit of the rate control value is output once every 4H. If the same _ continues, it will become the sixth digit of the lighting rate control value, which is the type of complaint that is output every 8H. By combining this, it is possible to convert from black one insertion to black division insertion. By constructing the circuit in which the black partition is inserted, and in the circuit method group for detecting the still picture including the method of the duck memory shown previously, the black insertion is performed once, so that the contour is clear. The driving method is a static drawing, and by inserting the black segmentation, the driving of the flicker caused by the insertion of a 94992-961016.doc -66 - 1295792 can be realized. As a means for pulling out the floating capacitance 451 of the source signal line 8 shown in the first 4, there is a method of preparing a voltage source 773 having a low impedance and applying a voltage to the source signal line 18. The above method is called pre-charge driving. Fig. 77 shows the circuit configuration of the precharge drive. A voltage source 773 and a voltage applying means 775 are provided in the circuit. When the voltage application means 775 turns on the switch, the voltage source 773 charges and discharges the floating capacitance 451 of the source signal line 18. For ease of illustration, the 774 is depicted separately from the source driver 14, but the 774 can also be built into the source driver 14. When the circuit configuration of the source signal line 18 which can be precharged by the voltage application means 775' is selected, the pre-charging can be turned on/off in units of pixels, so that fine setting can be performed. The present invention is based on the above-described circuit configuration using the still image detecting means 711, and a frame memory or the like may be used instead of 711. Compared to animation, the image degradation caused by the floating capacitance 451 as previously shown is more pronounced. Therefore, by detecting the still image by 711 and pre-charging by operating the voltage applying means 775' by the comparator 772, it is possible to prevent image deterioration at the time of still image. As described above, in the case of displaying the moving cymbal, in order to make the outline clear, it is preferable to insert it once, but in addition, it is preferable to drive the electric surface of the gate driver circuit of the organic EL display device, and it is preferable to insert black at a time. . Further, the gate driver 12 for driving the EL display panel operates the gate line 17b by the shift register 61b which operates the start pulse ST2 by the clock CLK2. As shown in Fig. 78, when black is inserted once, each gate signal line 17 can be turned on and off once during one frame period. However, as in the case where 782, 94992-961016.doc -67 - 1295792 is inserted in black, the gate signal line 17 is repeatedly turned on and off. Therefore, turning on and off the complex signal lines at the same time has a problem that the power consumption of the gate driver 12 becomes large. From the above point of view, it is generally preferred that the organic EL display device insert black at a time, however, in the case where black is inserted once, the flicker caused by the insertion of black once is observed in the still image. Therefore, the explanatory diagram of the display state of the panel in which the present invention is mounted displays a still image or an image with little motion. In the case of displaying a still image or an image with few motions, it is necessary to have a black insertion change into a split insertion once, but if it is changed from one insertion black to a division insertion, it appears to blink at the switching instant. There are two reasons for this. The first reason may be that the luminance is degraded when switching to one of the split insertions, as shown in Fig. 79, it is considered that the s horizontal scanning lines are lit in the p horizontal scanning lines. At this time, the number of scanning lines that are not lit, that is, black is p-s (bar), and when the two are divided, the number of scanning lines that are not lit is (p_s)/2 (bar). The scanning line of the current sever is turned on before switching, but only at the moment of switching, between s/2 (strip) redundancy and (PS)/2 (strip), the number of scanning lines becomes §/2 . During this period, since the luminance of the display area is s/2, although the luminance is reduced in only one frame, it may become image degradation. The second reason may be that the black interval changes rapidly. If black is inserted at one time, as one of the causes of image deterioration, it may be that the human eye unconsciously catches up with the insertion of black. Therefore, when the black segmentation is inserted by the state of black insertion, the interval at which the image is rapidly changed is felt, and the image is deteriorated. The present invention proposes to solve the above two problems, and there is no image degradation. 94992-961016.doc -68-1295792 The black insertion method is changed from one insertion to a divisional insertion method. The image degradation caused by the switching is caused by the rapid change in brightness and black feeling as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89, the present invention prevents the switching when the black interval is gradually divided between the plurality of frames. Like deterioration. Fig. 8 is a diagram showing the change in luminance when the horizontal scanning line number is divided by two during the N horizontal scanning period (indicated by h after the horizontal scanning period). In the case where the s horizontal line is illuminated, if the start pulse of the two divisions is 801 and the latter is 802, the number of light horizontal scanning lines of 8 () 1 and 8 () 2 becomes (S 2 4, 6...). Therefore, the start pulse of the previous stage is output to the gate _ I line and after the S/2W period, the number of horizontal scanning lines p of the EL display panel is (S/2)-N" The brightness is as follows before switching: { (p/S } Xl00(%)...(6) The curve shown in Fig. 81 is shown by a curve in Fig. 79 and the figure, and the redundancy is used once at the time of the knife edge. Brightness is closely related to image degradation. The value of 弋() is p SN, so as shown in the figure, the change is due to 8 and ^. According to the measured value, if the value of the analytical formula (6) is less than 75%, the image will be caused. Therefore, the value of the proposed formula (4) is more than 75% of the value of the formula (4), that is, according to the formula (6), N^s/4 (where Nd), the black insertion gap is increased. If the value of the formula (6) is 75% or more, the image deterioration will not cause the image to be more than 8〇%, and the effect can be expected. It is preferable to be (eight)% or more S/10). However, in the present invention, if the brightness is less than 75%, it is possible to change. In Fig. 79' s horizontal scanning line lights up (4) when the number of lighting horizontal scanning lines is divided into 2, divided into s/2, but this is divided into 8, strips and s_s> strips are not 94092-961016. Doc -69- 1295792 :(two <S). Further, the amount of the -sub-division is not limited to the two-division, and it is assumed that N=3, and the right second is 90% or more per one horizontal scanning period, and even if the four-division is still held once, the processing does not affect the processing. Fig. 82, the insertion and the insertion interval are 疋' so that the control light interval is moved to the next minute f until the black insertion interval is the same. However, as shown in Fig. 83, the knife can be adjusted first. Insertion interval. &, lighting interval: The effect of improving the image degradation is high, but it does not necessarily need to be consistent. The method is to gradually increase the black insertion interval, but it can also use the reverse to gradually reduce the xenon lamp level. The method of scanning the number of lines. If the condition of W lighting is divided into W and N, and then the method is divided into S rhyme and 2N method, the brightness will not become less than %, so it will not lead to Deterioration of the image caused by the gradation. This method should be caused by a sharp change in the black insertion interval of the first cause of the image 7, and thus image degradation occurs. However, as described above, the image degradation caused by the change in luminance may be Solved, so effective Fig. 85 shows a circuit configuration diagram for realizing the driving method of the present invention. The circuit configuration of the present invention comprises: two counter circuits 851, 852; and an added value control circuit 855 for controlling a circuit for generating signals by the two counters. 853, (10) and the added value of the two counters; and the selector (4) outputs any one of the output 856 outputted by (5) and the output 857 outputted by 854. The circuit 854 is illuminated by the light shown in FIG. The circuit that divides the value of the control value and the value of the counter w and outputs the waveform is reconstructed into a circuit with less delay. The circuit of Fig. 73 is the same as the 854, and any circuit can be used. The circuit 853 is when the counter 851 is 0, The output 856 becomes HI. Moreover, in the added value control 94092-961016.doc -70-1295792 circuit 855, the output lamp 856 is generated by the shell lamp rate control value. The ten value. The TO lamp rate control value is N bits. When the start pulse ST2 of the input gate driver 12 is divided into two t-th powers, the output 856 becomes L〇w at the time of the value of the high-order (Nt) bit of the lighting rate control value. 851 is set to (Nt) bits When the value becomes !, it is initialized to 〇. When this counter 851 is initialized, the selector 858 is controlled to select the output 857 from the circuit 854. The setting as described above is performed to facilitate the formation of the circuit. The π lamp rate control value is not required. For the divisible value, when the start pulse is divided into two t-human sides, when the shell lamp rate control value cannot be divisible, the start pulse after the division becomes a different length. The start pulse with different control lengths requires a new constituent circuit 'circuit configuration Therefore, it is advantageous to use the circuit configuration as described above. When the start pulse is divided into 2 to the power of t, the value between the t bits is divided by the low bit of the lighting rate control value to divide the lighting rate control value. By dividing the remainder of the t-th power of 2, the circuit division can be performed by complementing the remaining portion. When the circuit ' shown in Fig. 73 equivalent to the circuit 854 changes in the south bit t of the counter 205, the data output between the t bits is started in accordance with the lower bit of the lighting rate control value. The high position of the counter 852 is synchronized with the initialization of the counter 85 1 when changing between the epochs. Therefore, by the selection 858 selecting the output 857 of the circuit 854 at the initialization of the counter 851, the remaining portion can be complemented by The start pulse can be divided completely. Using this circuit constitutes a reduction in circuit scale. Using the actual values, the processing flow of the above circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 861 is the output 856 of circuit 853, 8 64 is the output 857 of circuit 854, 8 63 is the value of counter 94992-961016.doc -71 - 1295792 851, and 864 is the value of counter 852. The lighting rate control value has a value of 3 in the valley of 3 bits, and 011 in the case of 2 digits. When this is divided into two, it becomes t=i. Therefore, the value of the initial value of the counter 851 is set to 11, which is 3, which is 3, and the output of the circuit 853 is lowered to L〇w. Qi, 10 is 1. In circuit 853, the counter 851 is 〇, the output becomes 扪, and if the output is LOW, the output is LOW. In circuit 854, when counter 852 is 2, 4, 6, the output is HI. The period of the selection output 857 of the circuit 854 is when the counter 851 is initialized, that is, when the counter 8 5 2 is 4, if the two outputs are synthesized by the above circuit configuration, it will become like 865, and it can be confirmed that the start pulse can be obtained. 2 split. Next, a circuit configuration relating to the insertion interval of the gradually varying black using the added value control means will be described. The added value control means 85 5 is used to simultaneously control the two counters 85 852. The added value control means 855 distinguishes between the state of each added state, the added lighting rate control value, the number of waveform divisions or the value derived from the interval of black insertion, and the state of not adding any state, depending on the situation. In order to control the black insertion interval. The state change of the added value control means will be described with reference to FIG. The value initialized by the counter 851 is set to γ, and the value of the output 856 to LOW is set to X. 8701 is a vertical sync signal, 87〇2 is the start pulse of the black one-insert state, 8703 is the state of the black insertion interval 8704 of the previous stage as the state of N(H), and 8705 is the interval 8704 of the black insertion of the previous stage and the latter stage. The interval of the black insertion 8706 is substantially in the same interval state. If the state of the 8703 is changed to the state of 8705, the above image degradation is caused. Therefore, in the state of 8703, the black insertion interval 87〇4 of the previous stage is gradually increased to N, 2N, 3N, ..., and finally becomes the state of 8705. To prevent image degradation of 94092-961016.doc -72-1295792. The operation of the add value control circuit 855 regarding the state of 8703 will be described based on the graph of Fig. 87. The dotted line shown at 8707 is a curve of the value of the counter in the case where the counters 851 and 852 are each falsely rising. With respect to this, the curve 8708 of the realization is a graph of the value of the counter which controls the increment of the counters 851, 852 by the added value control circuit 855. The added value control circuit 855 is controlled by one increment counter 85, 852 so that the value of the counter 851 becomes X. Moreover, the counter 851 is at the time point again, and the start pulse becomes LOW. Originally, the next start pulse is the Y when the counter 851 is initialized, and there is a period of γ_χ(Η) therebetween. Here, the added value control means 855 is controlled to add a value as indicated by 8709 until the counters 851, 852 become the value of Υ-Ν. Thereby, the time until the start pulse is next changed is shortened to Ν (Η). Here, the added value control means 855 is, for example, 8710, and adds the value to the counter 851, and returns the value to 1. The counters 851, 852 are after N-1 (H) and have a value of γ. The period until the γ value is changed by the addition method of the value of 87〇9. When the value of 8709 is asynchronously added to the counter 851, the period until the Y value is reached may become N(H). In the present invention, any addition can be made. Therefore, the counter 851 is initialized, and after the output 857 is selected, the start pulse is again HI. Thereby, the interval 8704 of black insertion in the front stage becomes N (H). After the start pulse becomes m, after χ(Η), the start pulse becomes L0W again. Here, as shown in 8711, the added value control means 855 controls the counters 851 and 852 so that the counters 851 and 852 are not added, in order to make the values of the counters 851 and 852 equal to the values. The counters 851, 852 and 87G7 have the same value by the same period of time as the value added during the period of 8709. If the values of the counters 851 and (1) are the same as 94992-961016.doc -73 - 1295792 8707, the added value control means 855 returns the values of the counters 851, 852 to 1. Fig. 88 shows a change diagram of the counter 851 ' 852 when the division is changed from 2 divisions to 4 divisions, and Fig. 89 shows the change in the interval of the black insertion at that time. According to FIG. 89, it can be understood that, by using the above-described driving method, a driving method for gradually adjusting the black insertion interval can be realized, which is an image which is caused by image degradation caused by rapid brightness change and rapid black insertion interval variation. The problem of deterioration. "This fx month system /, to charge the electric charge programmed by the storage capacitor 丨 9, the switching transistor Iid turns on and off the current flowing through the driving transistor 1 & or 2711?, so that the control current is applied to the organic EL element 15 The circuit configuration during the period is not limited to that shown in Fig. 1 'as in the circuit configuration of Fig. 27. Further, the TFT used for the circuit configuration is a p-channel or an N-channel, and does not affect the driving method of the present invention. The circuit configuration shown is an N-channel configuration, but the configuration is also applicable to this configuration. Further, the configuration of the source driver 14 is not affected. Even if the storage capacitor 9〇1 is charged with a direct voltage as shown in Fig. 90, the driving is performed. The voltage driving circuit driven by the crystal 9 〇 2 can also use the driving method of the present invention, and can also be used for the display which determines the current amount by using the mirror ratio of the TFT which is generally called a current mirror as shown in Fig. 76. The method is to control the lighting rate, and the driving method of the current value of the control panel 'but as shown in FIG. 96' can also be adopted to control the lighting rate by inputting the signal line ST2 of the input gate driver 12 into the 961 mode. Group, such as 97 shows a method of controlling the amount of electrons of the source driving H 14 to adjust the current of the source signal (4) and controlling the amount of current of the panel in such a manner as to be a current value according to the lighting rate. The invention records as 94919-961016.doc -74- 1295792

如前述之圖98所示,As shown in Figure 98 above,

裝置之溫度上升, 可抑制流入裝置之電流量,因此可防止 可改善有機EL元件之壽命。 曰如圖12所示,有機EL元件係與流入有機EL元件15之電流 置成比例而發光量變大,因&,藉由控制流入有機el元件 之電流’#用有機EL元件之顯示器可擴展影像的表現範 圍。然而,如前述,採用有機EL元件之裝置係與流入裝置 之電流量成比例而溫度上升,因此將引起有機EL元件劣 化。因此,本發明係如前述,提案一種藉由從顯示資料控 制亮燈率,以便進行控制流入裝置之電流量之驅動,擴展 衫像之表現範圍之驅動。然而,此驅動方法亦由於亮燈率 的控制存在限度,因此無法將影像的表現範圍擴展到亮燈 率的倍率以上。 因此,如圖92所示,本發明係提案一種藉由在輸入外部 資料較小時,不僅提高亮燈率,還控制源極驅動器14之電 子量’以便控制流入源極信號線之電流之基準電流值,增 加流入像素之電流量,擴展採用有機EL元件之顯示器之影 像表現範圍之驅動方法。於圖93表示本驅動時之外部資料 及裝置全體之電流量之圖。93 1約不使用本驅動時之電流 94992-961016.doc -75- 1295792 值’ 932為採用本發明之亮燈率抑制驅動時之電流值。並 且’控制電子量之際所獲得之電流值為933,如同此圖,變 化電子量之範圍若將在亮燈率控制驅動之成為最大電流值 之外部資料之值設為P,則外部資料χ成為OSxSp。 於圖94表示每!像素之灰度與亮度之關係圖。941為不進 行亮燈率控制驅動時之關係圖。942為已進行亮燈率之情況 之最大亮燈率時之關係圖。943係除了亮燈率控制驅動以 外,還進行基準電流控制驅動時之關係圖。在壽命、電池 之關係上,若電流僅以941之關係流入之構成之情況。亮燈 率最大及最小時之比為3 :丨,若進行亮燈率控制驅動,可 使942以941之4倍亮度亮燈。除其以外,並且在藉由源極驅 動器14之電子里,使基準電流值可變到3倍之情況,可使943 進—步以942之3倍亮度發光,若與941比較,能以達12倍之 冗度發光,因此每1像素之表現範圍成為12倍,藉此可實現 多彩的圖像表現。 為了增加流入有機EL元件15之電流量,如前述控制源極 驅動器14之電流量。控制方法不只限於電子量,例如:亦 可使用D/A比較器變化電壓。以電壓將儲存電容19直接充電 之構成時’只要是可藉由數位資料控制充電電壓之構造, 均可適用本發明。 電子里之设疋係利用顯示資料合計電路95 1之輸出。於圖 95 ’顯不資料係包含作為影像資料之RGB,但只要是利用 熱敏電阻之資料等可確認裝置狀況之資料均可使用。95 i 在構造上具有與552相同之構造。與552之相異點在於,輸 94992-961016.doc -76- 1295792 出比用以控制亮燈率所需之位元數更數位元下之位元為 止。假設952係設計成在用以控制亮燈率所需之位元數為8 位時,輸出影像資料之合計值之高位ι〇位元分。此位 儿分之而位8位元係用於控制亮燈率,屆時,剩餘的低位2 =可視為高位8位元之小數點部分。源極驅動器14之電子 夏為6位元,亮燈率為1〇進數,於未滿丨之區域控制電子量 時,951為了以亮燈率控制所需之8位元之 分控制電子量,加上6位元分,輸出合計14位元。此為舉^ 951之輸出係輸出15位元以上,其中高位恤元用於亮燈率 :制’低位6位元用於電子量之控制亦可。又,使用於控制 党燈率之位it及利用於控制電子量之位元重疊亦可。例 如:951進行10位元之輸出’高位8位元用於亮燈率之控制, 低位6位元用於控制電子量時,亮燈率控制資料之低位4位 凡與電子量控制之高位4位元使用相同位元。亮燈率控制及 電子量控制均控制裝置之發光量,但控制亮度方向(使變量 或變暗)均相同,因此在影像上不構成問題。總合來說,在 免燈率控制需要a位元’電子量控制需W位元的狀態下, 951輸出X位元之際,將951輸出之高位a位元用於亮燈率控 制’低位b位元用於電子量控料可。951之輪出資料由丽 電路反轉係由於電子量變化及顯示資料之關係處於若 柄料變小’電子量之值變大之反轉關係所致。如圖92 所不,若進行顯示資料越小,增大亮燈率之驅動時,將成 為顯不資料越小,越增大電子量之構造。因此,藉由利用 NOT電路反轉資料,能實現以Η_τ電路,實現資料越小 94992-961016.doc -77- 1295792 電子篁變得越大之構造。藉此,可不增大電路規模而實現。 /匕較電路954係對於控料子量之區塊輸出致能信號。比 較,路954係951所輸出之資料為N位元,低位峨元用於電 子里之際;S*判斷出向位(N_n)位元是否為〇,則輸出致能 信號。藉此,可實現不增大電路規模而以特定之顯示資料 控制電子量之電路構成。 又’亦可如圖99所示,使用控制亮燈率之值之低位數位 兀。動作原理係與前述相同,但以控制亮燈率之值控制時, 亮燈率越大,亦只要使電子量之值越大即可,因此無須加 入NOT電路。如圖61所示,此方式係於由顯示資料做成控 制亮燈率之資料之際,使用進行防止閃燦之延遲處理之模 組時,可與延遲處理同時使用,因此有效。 NOT電路是否需要,在源極驅動器14之電子量之構成亦 有變化。電子量之開關在HI變化或在乙〇臀變化,電路 是否需要等會變化。 此方式係利用使用於控制亮燈率之信號線,控制電子 篁,因此電路規模幾乎不變大而可實現控制電子量。又, 藉由此處理,可增大每丨像素之表現範圍,因此可實現更多 彩之圖像顯示。 有機EL元件之劣化係取決於裝置溫度,而且裝置溫度上 升取決於流入裝置之電流量總和及流入元件之電流量的部 分甚大。因此,為了防止有機EL元件劣化,需要一種按照 裝置溫度操作電流量之構成。作為感測裝置溫度之方法之 意,有在裝置内配置熱敏電阻,藉由熱敏電阻及A/D轉換器 94992-961016.doc • 78 - 1295792 轉換成數位資料並感測之方法。然而,此方法必須在裝置 内部或像素内部配置熱敏電阻,並且為了作為數位資料而 感測’亦需要A/D轉換器,因此具有電路規模變大的問題。 因此,本發明提案一種利用由圖111所示之先前所示之影 像資料控制亮燈率掃描線數之構成,以控制溫度之驅動方 法0 於圖29表不進行由先前所示之影像資料控制亮燈掃描線 數之驅動方法時之影像資料及亮燈水平掃描線數之關係。 由於亮燈水平掃描線數與流入裝置之電流之關係如同 1010,因此藉由從亮燈水平掃描線數及影像資料進行運算 處理,可掌握流入裝置之電流量。因此利用如圖102所示之 電路。1020為顯示於裝置之影像資料。1〇21為用以加工輸 入之影像資料之電路。假設輸入RGB三色,rgb在流入裝 置之電流量有差異時,藉由在1〇21内,對於資料附加權重, 可算出更正確的電流值。又’在資料精度不高亦可的情況, 藉由在1021削去低位數位元,由於資料精度雖下降,但資 料量本身變小,因此可縮小電路規模。1〇22係加算由1〇21 輸出之資料之電路。通常之影像資料係於5〇①至⑽Hz之 間顯示,因此影像資料亦以相同速度變化。然而,如先前 所示’為了防止圖像之閃燦等劣化,亮燈掃描線數之變化 係歷經數t貞而逐漸變化,而且亦可說影像幾乎不會在丄幢内 持續變大。因此’以〇加算數巾貞分之資料,藉由除以加算之 幢數,求取數㈣之平均電流值。此時,加算之㈣數宜為2 的η次方。加算之㈣不是♦次方時,為了取得正確之平 94992-961016.doc -79- 1295792 均值’必須使用除法器,電路規模變大。加算之幀數為2 的η次方時’藉由使加算值朝LSB側偏移η位元,可獲得與 除算相同的效果,並縮小電路規模。如先前所述,由於亮 燈水平掃描線數之變化歷經1〇〜2〇〇幀,因此1〇22之輸出亦 宜求取16〜256幀分之平均資料。6〇 Ηζ之影像資料之情況, 1秒歷經60巾貞’因此若特別求取64幀分之平均值,1〇22之輸 出資料可視為每1秒之平均電流量,因此易於掌握電流量。 1022之輸出係輸入包含FIF〇記憶體1〇23之掌握一定期間 電流值之電路1024。FIFO記憶體1023係内建控制寫入位址 及讀入位址之計數器之記憶體,由於可同時看到記憶體内 部的最新資料及最舊資料,因此藉由使用Fif〇記憶體,可 經常掌握一定期間之電流資料。再者,於此情況,記憶體 未必需為FIFO。藉由為了寫入及讀入準備位址之計數器並 控制,控制新資料及舊資料係與使用FIFO相同。 藉由圖103,說明使用FIF0記憶體之掌握一定期間電流值 之電路1024之構成。如先前所示,FIFO記憶體係内建控制 寫入位址及讀入位址之計數器之記憶體。當寫入位址來到 讀入位址之前1個時,FIFO記憶體發出FULL信號1030。此 係表示寫入位址來到讀入位置之前1個,換言之,表示來自 發出FULL信號1030之狀態下之FIFO之輸出資料1032為 FIFO記憶體中最舊的資料。1033係為了儲存]pIF〇内部資料 之總加算值之暫存器。由於FIFO成為替換資料之構造,因 此取得輸出側資料1032及輸入側資料1034之差,以1035加 算。1036係藉由FULL信號選擇來自FIFO之輪出資料1032 94992-961016.doc -80 - 1295792 或〇的選擇器。出現FULL信號時,選擇來自FIFO之輸出, 未出現時,選擇0,以便FIFO記憶體内之最新資料及最舊資 料之差輸入1033。又,藉由採取此方式,可確保由啟動時 到FIFO δ己憶體充滿為止之期間,亦可提升電路精度。fif〇 記憶體係存在寫入致能信號1031及讀入致能信號1〇37,致 能信號輸入時,藉由FIFO記憶體之輸入區塊,於寫入位址 寫入輸入資料,或者讀入輸出資料1〇33。藉由1〇38之電路 控制此寫入致能信號,藉由full信號控制讀入致能資料。 讀入致能信號係僅於出現full信號時輸入FIF0,寫入致能 信號係於出現FULL信號時,不輸入FIF0。藉由採用此種電 路構成’可提升FIFO記憶體之内部資料之精度。 由於FIFO記憶體之容量,可儲存之資料,亦即電流量之 測定期間變化。如圖104所示,裝置之溫度上升到達飽和之 時間係由於發光面積而變化,在發光面積小時花費丨分,發 光面積廣時花費10分。因此,必須準備可掌握從現在到過 去1刀10为間之電流值之記憶體份量。而且,電流飽和為 止之時間係由於裝置大小、放熱條件、有機EL元件之材料 而變化,因此視條件可能需要掌握更長時間之電流值。 其次,根據圖105,說明電流量之控制方法。如前述,本 發明係藉由從影像資料操作亮燈水平掃描線數,以控制亮 燈時間,抑制電流量。由影像資料控制亮燈水平掃描線數 之方法係將最大之亮燈水平掃描線數1〇5〇及最小之亮燈水 平掃描線數1051輸入於亮燈率控制電路1〇54,藉由從該2 點運异,導出影像資料與亮燈水平掃描線數之關係,因應 94992-961016.doc -81 - 1295792 於輸入資料1052而輸出輸出資料1053。運算方法可採用取 得1050及1〇51之差,以根據影像資料之分割數進行除算而 得出斜率之方法。此時,如同1〇6〇,若將1〇51與1〇5〇之差 等分’關係將成為比例關係,而且如同丨〇6丨藉由附加權重 而分割,亦可描繪曲線。如圖1〇7所示,本發明係採用藉由 1〇24之輸出值而控制1〇5〇及1〇51之電路1〇7〇,進行電流抑 制。輸入1070之1071係輸入是否進行電流抑制之邊界值, 來自1024之輸出大於1071時,進行電流抑制,比1〇71小時, 不進行電流抑制。如前述,電流抑制係藉由操作最大亮燈 水平掃描線數1050及最小亮燈水平掃描線數1〇51而進行。 1024之輸出比1071大時,藉由輸出將最大亮燈水平掃描線 數1〇5〇及最小亮燈水平掃描線數1051降低之值1〇72、 1073,以便抑制電流,但作為降低方法有在超過1 1時, 降低疋1,或者運算1024之輸出與ι〇71之差,降低該值 部分的方法。後者可精細控制電流抑制量,因此抑制量之 精度提高。又,控制1050及1〇51時,無須使降低值相同。 亦可考慮如圖108僅降低1050的方法。 於圖109表不控制最大亮燈水平掃描線數1〇5〇及最小亮 k水平柃描線數丨05丨時之亮燈水平掃描線數與影像資料之 關係及進行控制時之流入裝置之電流量相對於影像資料 之關係圖。 1093為完全未控制亮燈水平掃描線數之情況。1〇94為控 制儿燈水平掃描線數之情況。1〇95為控制ι〇5ΐ、之情 况。右於一疋時間抑制電流量,其間輸入之資料變小, 94992-961016.doc -82- 1295792 因此結果由1024輸出之值轡]、,中▲ 值釔小,電流抑制值變小,或返回 如同1090之狀況。藉此,即使 、 1之不知用熱敏電阻等外部電路 測定溫度,仍可進行僅以影傻眘 丨罜乂〜像貝枓抑制溫度上升之驅動。 又,由於集中於1處亮燈,溫度 上升亦谷易上升,因此藉 由採用如圖71之檢測靜止圖像 口1豕 < 電路,將靜止圖像作為 1051、1050之控制值利用亦為 邓馮非常有效之手段。界時之 電路構成圖係如圖110所示。 若進行前述之間歇驅動,一次脾 人將黑插入,可製作在動畫When the temperature of the device rises, the amount of current flowing into the device can be suppressed, so that the life of the organic EL element can be prevented from being improved. As shown in FIG. 12, the organic EL element is proportional to the current flowing into the organic EL element 15 and the amount of light emission is increased, and the current flowing into the organic EL element can be expanded by the display of the organic EL element by & The range of performance of the image. However, as described above, the apparatus using the organic EL element is proportional to the amount of current flowing into the device, and the temperature rises, so that the organic EL element is deteriorated. Accordingly, the present invention has been proposed to extend the driving range of the shirt image by controlling the lighting rate from the display data to control the amount of current flowing into the device. However, this driving method also has a limit on the control of the lighting rate, so that the expression range of the image cannot be extended to the magnification of the lighting rate. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92, the present invention proposes a reference for controlling the current flowing into the source signal line by controlling not only the lighting rate but also the amount of electrons of the source driver 14 when the input external data is small. The current value increases the amount of current flowing into the pixel, and expands the driving method of the image representation range of the display using the organic EL element. Fig. 93 is a view showing the external data at the time of driving and the current amount of the entire device. 93 1 About the current when the drive is not used 94992-961016.doc -75- 1295792 The value '932 is the current value when the driving rate of the present invention is used to suppress the driving. And the current value obtained when controlling the amount of electrons is 933. As in this figure, if the value of the varying electron amount is set to P, the value of the external data which is driven to the maximum current value by the lighting rate control is set to P, then the external dataχ Become an OSxSp. Figure 94 shows each! A plot of the grayscale and brightness of a pixel. 941 is a diagram when the lighting rate control is not driven. 942 is a relationship diagram of the maximum lighting rate in the case where the lighting rate has been performed. In addition to the lighting rate control drive, the 943 is also a diagram for controlling the reference current control drive. In the relationship between the life and the battery, if the current flows only in the relationship of 941, it flows. The ratio of the maximum and minimum lighting rate is 3: 丨, if the lighting rate control is driven, the 942 can be illuminated at 4 times the brightness of 941. In addition, and in the case where the reference current value is changed to 3 times in the electrons of the source driver 14, the 943 can be illuminated at a brightness of 942 times, if compared with the 941, With 12 times of redundancy, the performance range per pixel is 12 times, which enables colorful image representation. In order to increase the amount of current flowing into the organic EL element 15, the amount of current of the source driver 14 is controlled as described above. The control method is not limited to the amount of electrons. For example, the D/A comparator can also be used to vary the voltage. When the storage capacitor 19 is directly charged by voltage, the present invention can be applied as long as it can control the charging voltage by digital data. The setting in the electronic system utilizes the output of the display data totaling circuit 95 1 . In Fig. 95, the data is displayed as RGB as the image data. However, any data that can confirm the condition of the device using the data of the thermistor can be used. 95 i has the same construction as 552 in construction. The difference with 552 is that the output 94992-961016.doc -76-1295792 is more than the number of bits required to control the lighting rate. Assume that the 952 is designed to output the high-order octave of the total value of the image data when the number of bits required to control the lighting rate is 8 bits. This bit is divided into 8 bits to control the lighting rate. At that time, the remaining low 2 = can be regarded as the decimal point of the upper 8 bits. The electron driver of the source driver 14 is 6 bits in the summer, and the lighting rate is 1 〇. When the amount of electrons is controlled in the area not full, the 951 controls the amount of electrons in order to control the octet required for the lighting rate control. , plus 6 bit points, the output totals 14 bits. This is the output of the ^ 951 output is more than 15 bits, of which the high-end shirt is used for the lighting rate: the low-level 6-bit is used for the control of the electronic quantity. Moreover, it is also possible to use the bit which is used to control the party lamp rate and the bit used to control the amount of electrons to overlap. For example: 951 for 10-bit output 'High 8-bit for control of lighting rate, low 6-bit for controlling electronic quantity, low-level 4 bits of lighting rate control data and high level of electronic control 4 The bits use the same bit. Both the lighting rate control and the electronic quantity control control the amount of illumination of the device, but the direction of the brightness (making the variable or darkening) is the same, so there is no problem in the image. In summary, in the state where the lamp-free rate control requires a bit 'electronic quantity control to require W bit, when 951 outputs X bit, the high bit a of the 951 output is used for the lighting rate control 'low position. The b bit is used for electronic quantity control. The round-out data of 951 is caused by the reversal of the electronic circuit and the display data due to the change in the amount of electrons and the fact that the value of the electrons becomes larger. As shown in Fig. 92, if the display data is smaller and the driving rate of the lighting rate is increased, the structure of the electronic quantity is increased as the data is smaller. Therefore, by using the NOT circuit to invert the data, the Η_τ circuit can be realized, and the smaller the data is realized. 94992-961016.doc -77- 1295792 The structure in which the electronic cymbal becomes larger. Thereby, it can be realized without increasing the circuit scale. /匕Comparative circuit 954 is an output enable signal for the block controlling the amount of material. In comparison, the data outputted by the Road 954 system 951 is N bits, and the low bit unit is used in the electronic; if S* determines whether the bit (N_n) bit is 〇, the enable signal is output. Thereby, it is possible to realize a circuit configuration in which the amount of electrons is controlled by a specific display material without increasing the circuit scale. Also, as shown in Fig. 99, the low-order bit of the value of the control lighting rate is used. The principle of operation is the same as described above, but when the value of the lighting rate is controlled, the lighting rate is larger, and the value of the electron amount is larger, so that it is not necessary to add a NOT circuit. As shown in Fig. 61, this mode is effective when the display data is used to control the lighting rate, and when the module for preventing the delay of the flashing is used, it can be used simultaneously with the delay processing. Whether or not the NOT circuit is required, the configuration of the amount of electrons in the source driver 14 also changes. The switch of the electronic quantity changes in HI or changes in the 〇 〇 hip, whether the circuit needs to change etc. In this way, the signal line is used to control the lighting rate, and the electronic cymbal is controlled, so that the circuit scale is almost constant and the amount of control electrons can be realized. Moreover, by this processing, the performance range of each pixel can be increased, so that more color image display can be realized. The deterioration of the organic EL element depends on the temperature of the device, and the rise in temperature of the device depends on the sum of the current amount flowing into the device and the portion of the current flowing into the device. Therefore, in order to prevent deterioration of the organic EL element, a configuration in which the amount of current is operated in accordance with the device temperature is required. As a method of sensing the temperature of the device, there is a method in which a thermistor is disposed in the device, which is converted into a digital data by a thermistor and an A/D converter 94992-961016.doc • 78 - 1295792. However, this method requires the thermistor to be disposed inside the device or inside the pixel, and the A/D converter is also required for sensing as digital data, and thus has a problem that the circuit scale becomes large. Therefore, the present invention proposes a method for controlling the temperature of the scanning line by using the image data previously shown in FIG. 111 to control the temperature. The driving method 0 for controlling the temperature is shown in FIG. The relationship between the image data and the number of lighting horizontal scanning lines when the driving method of the number of scanning lines is turned on. Since the relationship between the number of lighting horizontal scanning lines and the current flowing into the device is 1010, the amount of current flowing into the device can be grasped by performing arithmetic processing from the scanning level of the lighting level and the image data. Therefore, the circuit shown in Fig. 102 is used. 1020 is the image data displayed on the device. 1〇21 is a circuit for processing the input image data. Assuming that three colors of RGB are input and rgb has a difference in the amount of current flowing into the device, a more accurate current value can be calculated by adding a weight to the data within 1〇21. In addition, in the case where the data accuracy is not high, by cutting the low-order bit at 1021, the data accuracy is reduced, but the amount of data itself is reduced, so that the circuit scale can be reduced. 1〇22 is a circuit that adds data from 1〇21. Normal image data is displayed between 5〇1 and (10)Hz, so the image data changes at the same speed. However, as previously shown, in order to prevent deterioration of the image, the change in the number of scanning lines of the light gradually changes over the number t贞, and it can be said that the image hardly grows large in the raft. Therefore, the average current value of the number (4) is obtained by dividing the data by the arithmetic number. At this time, the sum of (4) should be 2 to the nth power. Addition (4) is not the ♦ power, in order to get the right level 94992-961016.doc -79- 1295792 Mean' must use a divider, the circuit scale becomes larger. When the number of added frames is η power of 2', by shifting the added value toward the LSB side by η bits, the same effect as the division is obtained, and the circuit scale is reduced. As described earlier, since the change in the number of horizontal scanning lines of the light has passed through 1 to 2 frames, the output of 1 to 22 should also be averaged from 16 to 256 frames. In the case of 6〇 影像 image data, 1 second has passed 60 frames 贞' Therefore, if the average value of 64 frames is specifically obtained, the output data of 1〇22 can be regarded as the average current per 1 second, so it is easy to grasp the current amount. The output of 1022 is a circuit 1024 that contains a current value for a certain period of time including FIF(R) memory 1〇23. The FIFO memory 1023 is a built-in memory for controlling the write address and the counter to read the address. Since the latest data and the oldest data in the memory can be simultaneously seen, the memory can be frequently used by using the Fif memory. Master the current data for a certain period of time. Furthermore, in this case, the memory does not have to be a FIFO. By controlling and controlling the counters of the prepared address in order to write and read, the control of the new data and the old data is the same as the use of the FIFO. The configuration of the circuit 1024 for grasping the current value for a certain period of time using the FIF0 memory will be described with reference to FIG. As previously shown, the FIFO memory system has built-in memory that controls the write of the address and the counter that reads the address. The FIFO memory issues a FULL signal 1030 when the write address comes to one of the read-in addresses. This indicates that the write address comes before the read position, in other words, the output data 1032 from the FIFO in the state in which the FULL signal 1030 is issued is the oldest data in the FIFO memory. 1033 is a register for storing the total added value of the internal data of ]pIF. Since the FIFO is a structure for replacing data, the difference between the output side data 1032 and the input side data 1034 is obtained, and is added at 1035. The 1036 selects the selector from the FIFO by means of the FULL signal 1032 94992-961016.doc -80 - 1295792 or 〇. When the FULL signal appears, select the output from the FIFO. When it does not appear, select 0 to enter the difference between the latest data and the oldest data in the FIFO memory. Moreover, by adopting this method, it is possible to ensure the accuracy of the circuit from the time of starting up to the time when the FIFO δ memory is full. The fif〇 memory system has a write enable signal 1031 and a read enable signal 1〇37. When the enable signal is input, the input data is written in the write address by the input block of the FIFO memory, or read in. The output data is 1〇33. The write enable signal is controlled by a circuit of 1〇38, and the enable data is read by the full signal. The read enable signal is input to FIF0 only when a full signal occurs, and the write enable signal is not input to FIF0 when a FULL signal occurs. By using such a circuit, the accuracy of the internal data of the FIFO memory can be improved. Due to the capacity of the FIFO memory, the data that can be stored, that is, the amount of current, varies during the measurement period. As shown in Fig. 104, the time when the temperature rise of the device reaches saturation is changed by the light-emitting area, and it takes 10 minutes when the light-emitting area is small and the light-emitting area is wide. Therefore, it is necessary to prepare a memory amount that can grasp the current value from now to the past. Further, the time during which the current is saturated varies depending on the size of the device, the exothermic condition, and the material of the organic EL element, and therefore it may be necessary to grasp the current value for a longer period depending on the condition. Next, a method of controlling the amount of current will be described based on Fig. 105. As described above, the present invention suppresses the amount of current by controlling the number of scanning lines from the image data to control the lighting time. The method of controlling the number of horizontal scanning lines by the image data is to input the maximum number of lighting horizontal scanning lines 1〇5〇 and the minimum number of lighting horizontal scanning lines 1051 into the lighting rate control circuit 1〇54, by The 2 points of the difference, the relationship between the image data and the number of horizontal scanning lines is output, and the output data 1053 is output in response to the input data 1052 according to 94092-961016.doc -81 - 1295792. The calculation method can take the difference between 1050 and 1〇51 to calculate the slope based on the number of divisions of the image data. At this time, as in the case of 1〇6〇, if the difference between 1〇51 and 1〇5〇 is divided, the relationship will become a proportional relationship, and as the 丨〇6丨 is divided by the additional weight, the curve can also be drawn. As shown in Fig. 1 and 7, the present invention performs current suppression by controlling the circuits 1〇5〇 of 1〇5〇 and 1〇51 by the output value of 1〇24. The 1071 input of the input 1070 is the boundary value of the current suppression. When the output from 1024 is greater than 1071, the current suppression is performed, and the current suppression is not performed for 1 to 71 hours. As described above, the current suppression is performed by operating the maximum lighting horizontal scanning line number 1050 and the minimum lighting level scanning line number 1〇51. When the output of 1024 is larger than 1071, the output is reduced by the value of the maximum number of horizontal scanning lines by 1〇5〇 and the minimum number of lighting horizontal scanning lines by 101051, 72, 1073, so as to suppress the current, but as a method of reducing When it exceeds 1 1 , the method of lowering the value of 疋1, or calculating the difference between the output of 1024 and ι 71, lowers the value portion. The latter can finely control the amount of current suppression, so the accuracy of the suppression amount is improved. Also, when controlling 1050 and 1〇51, it is not necessary to make the reduction values the same. A method of reducing only 1050 as shown in FIG. 108 can also be considered. In Fig. 109, the relationship between the number of scanning horizontal scanning lines and the image data when the maximum lighting level scanning line number is 1〇5〇 and the minimum bright k level scanning line number 丨05丨 is controlled, and the current flowing into the device during control is controlled. A graph of the amount relative to the image data. 1093 is the case where the number of scan lines is not controlled at all. 1〇94 is the case of controlling the number of horizontal scanning lines of the children's lights. 1〇95 is the case of controlling ι〇5ΐ. The current is suppressed by the right time, and the input data becomes smaller. 94992-961016.doc -82- 1295792 Therefore, the result is 1024 output value 辔], the middle ▲ value is small, the current suppression value becomes smaller, or returns as The situation of 1090. Therefore, even if it is not known that the temperature is measured by an external circuit such as a thermistor, it is possible to perform a drive that suppresses the temperature rise only by the shadow. Moreover, since the temperature rises and the valley rises easily due to the concentration of one light, the use of the still image as the control value of 1051 and 1050 is also adopted by using the detection still image port 1 豕 < Deng Feng is a very effective means. The circuit diagram of the boundary time is shown in Fig. 110. If the above intermittent driving is performed, a spleen inserts black and can be made in an animation.

貝不時,輪廊清晰之鮮明圖像。然而,藉由間歇驅動之黑 插入率右k冋’具有圖像將看似閃爍的問題。特別是在採 用有機EL元件之顯示器,與液晶顯示器不同,由白變里的 速度(或者相反)的速度快,因此閃爍將看似更明顯。作為抑 制閃爍的方法,有在由於採用如圖85所示之電路構成,容 易看似閃爍之靜止圖像期間或在黑插入率極高的狀況下, 私用刀割黑插人之電路構成,以抑制閃爍的方法。缺而, 此驅動方法在只要畫面之一部分移動之動畫的情況:、不分 ^插入黑’因此產生閃爍。極難以正確判斷圖像之顯示狀 態,以此驅動方法不可能解決此問題。因A,提案一種驅 動方法係如圖112所示’當黑插入率進入引起閃爍之區 或夺藉由重新做成黑插入之場所,以便抑制閃爍,並且 藉由維持—定之黑插入間隔,實現動畫性能的提升。 曰如前述,於有機EL顯示器進行間歇驅動時,藉由控制電 而進行。又,電晶體11 d係藉由閘極艇動器12所輸 出之17b而控制,因此為了控制黑插入率,只要控制⑺即 94992-961016.doc • 83 - 1295792 可0 於本發明係將1幀進行8分割,以各區塊單位進行黑插入 之控制。為了將1幀進行8分割,每1分割成為1幀的125%。 設定在此12.5%之理由為,發現黑插入造成閃爍的條件係在 15%至25%附近之黑插入率開始看見閃爍,由25%至5〇%間 顯著地看見閃爍。為了使不成為此可見閃爍之黑插入率以 上’藉由設定此12.5%之區塊,以使1個黑塊不超過12·5%。 4一疋此可見閃燦之範圍由於顯示器大小、發光亮度、影像 頻率等而變化,因此可見閃爍的黑插入率小時,亦可將工 幀進打16分割(6.75%),相反地,可見閃爍之黑插入率高 時’亦可將1幀4分割(25%)。 如圖113所示而將分割之場所編號。此編號係表示藉由亮 燈水平掃描線數而亮燈之順序。若將丨幀間如前述進行8分 割’如圖113’以〇、4、2、6、1、5、3、7的順序附加編號。 控制17b以便由〇號開始依序亮燈。反過來說,由7號開始 成為非亮燈狀態,亦即進行黑插入。如1131 ’黑插入在〇% 至12.5%為止間,7號的區塊為非亮燈狀態。如i 132,由i2.5% 至25%為止間’ 7號區塊全部維持非亮燈狀態,㈣期間為 非亮燈狀態。藉由此驅動方法,將黑塊保持在一定量,於 其他場所進行黑插人,可維持提升動畫性能而同時抑制閃 爍。於圖114表示實現此驅動之電.路構成。作為例示,將丄 鴨間進行2的η次方分割。亮燈水平掃描線數114咖位元構 成時’取得亮燈水平掃描線數142之高位η位元u43與亮燈 順序1144之比較。亮燈順序U44係將以水平同步信號正數 94992-961016.doc -84- 1295792 之计數态之值1 1 4 1之鬲位n位元經由轉換器1 1 46之輸出 值。1143比亮燈順序1144小時,控制由來自閘極信號線17b 之輸出之信號1145係輸出LOW,此時,1145為LOW時,使 lid為關閉狀態。亮燈順序1144與1143相同時,進行1142之 低位(N-n)位元值分之HI輸出。1143比1144大時,Π45進行 HI輸出。若進行此,成為如同圖113,存在12·5%以上之黑 插入率時,至少在丨個區間可確保12·5%之黑插入,可維持 藉由進行一定量之黑插入而實現動畫性能提升,同時可防 止閃爍。此時,如圖113編號最能防止閃爍,但本發明不限 於此順序,畢竟只是藉由將分割期間編號,進行編號與亮 丈且水平掃描線數之控制線之大小比較,以選擇黑插入之場 所。又,如圖115所示,在確保可提高動畫性能之量之後, 仔細插入黑之方法亦有效。一般而言,為了提升動晝性能, 舄要25%以上之黑插入,又,若於5〇%以上之區域一次進行 黑插入,容易引起閃燦,因此,由〇%至5〇%為止,一次進 行黑插入,50%以後,以不引起閃燦之方式,分割進行黑 插入而驅動尤佳。 又,轉換器1146有製作針對輸入值選擇輸出值之表格之 方法,及如圖122所示之採用依序替換高位及低位之轉換電 路之方法。後者的做法具有縮小電路規模的優點。 圖116、117、118、119、12〇、121係不採用如圖7ι所示 之幀記體體而實現檢測靜止圖像之電路構成者。藉由採用 此電路,可不擴大電路規模而檢測靜止圖像。藉由此電路, 可防止有機EL之殘影。 94992-961016.doc -85- 1295792 如前述,有機EL具有元件劣化所造成之壽命。作為元件 劣化的原因,可舉例元件周邊之溫度或流入元件本身之電 流量。如前述,有機EL元件係與電流量成比例而溫度上升。 採用有機EL元件之顯示器係將有機£]1元件配置於各像素 而構成,因此由於配置於各像素之有機ELs件之電流量越 增加,各EL元件越發光,顯示器全體溫度上升,導致元件 劣化。因此,於採用有機EL元件之顯示器,在全體顯示器 之發熱量變多之圖像之情況,必須抑制流入有機el元件之 電流。 如前述,作為抑制有機EL元件電流量之方法,有如圖29 所示之對於輸入資料控制有機EL元件之發光時間之方法。 藉由控制有機EL的發光時間,具有電流量受到控制,發熱 量減少,壽命改善的效果。然而,由於流入有機EL元件之 電流量亦是元件劣化的原因之一,因此若如同圖123,藉由 $制流入元件之電流量本身,進行減少全體顯示器之電流 罝之驅動,可進一步防止元件劣化。 叩抑制流入件之電流量本身的方法,只要抑制源極驅動 :二4為了將電流流入驅動電晶體Ua之基準電流線,之電 流量即可。作為抑制基準電流線629之電流量之手段,有使 用以做成基準電源線636之電壓之電阻成為可變電阻,操作 :阻值本身的方法。又,有如圖62所示,於源極驅動器本 、、’做成操作基準電流之電子量625,操作電子量625的方 f於圖124表示使用電子量用以控制電流量之電路構成。 猎合計顯示資料之電路1241判定影像資料,並輸入電流 94992-961〇i6.d< 1295792 抑制電路1242。電流抑制電路係如同5 5 5之運算亮燈率之電 路,或如同612之具有延遲電路之電路,或由輸入資料算出 用以抑制電流之亮燈水平掃描線數之電路。不控制亮燈水 平掃描線數,而以電子量控制電流量之情況,藉由以轉換 電路1243轉換控制亮燈水平掃描線數之信號線,輸入電子 量控制電路1244而可進行控制。又,此時,藉由在電子量 控制電路(轉換電路)1244内,準備選擇電流抑制方法之信號 線1245,以便以亮燈水平掃描線數或電子量之任一方,均 可形成控制電流量之電路構成。 0 然而,以電子量等抑制基準電流而抑制電流量的方法具 有缺點。 如别述,於源極信號線丨8存在浮游電容45丨,為了使源極 信號線電壓變化,必須拉出此浮游電容之電荷。此拉出所 花費的時間△ T為△ Q(浮游電容之電荷)=1(流入源極信號 線之電流)χΔΤ=(:(浮游電容值)χΔν。由於灰度越低,工值 變得越小,因此難以拉出浮游電容451之電荷,因此變化成 特定党度前之信號寫入像素内部之問題,越明顯出現於越_ 低灰度顯示。因此,若使用電子量抑制基準電流量,在低 灰度顯不時,上述問題更顯著出現,因此難以在低灰度部 保持灰度。 因此,本發明提案一種藉由如圖125所示轉換輸入之資料 本身’將貢料-律地縮小’以便縮小電流量之方法。由於 縮J資料里本身’因此可表現之灰度變小,但於低灰度部, 由於源極驅動器14的輸出本身亦未變小,因此如上述之浮 94992-961016.doc -87- 1295792 游電容所造成之寫入不万 个疋的問碭消失。又,資料量變少, 亦即流入有機EL元件之雷泠旦士 ώ ^ 爪里本身亦變小,因此可防止元 件劣化。細小貝料量亦即可表現之最大灰度數降低。如圖 125所示,藉由相對於輸人資料之合計量,將最大灰度數由 X降低至χ/4 ’最大可將電流量抑制到1/4。η”係表示削減 最大灰度數時之其他灰度之圖。藉由最大灰度減少至1/4, 到其為止之中間灰度亦同樣減少。此驅動之優點為在於, 通常減少灰度數係每i灰度之電流量差變大,因此若顯示圖 像眼目月^看到冗度差,發生看到擬似輪廓的問題。然而, 於此驅動,最大灰度數雖減少,但每丨灰度之電流量不變, 因此即使說灰度數減少,仍不致發生擬似輪廓。 作為縮小資料量之方法,有藉由圖126所示之轉換擴張輸 入資料伽瑪曲線而進行之方法。伽瑪曲線轉換係採用具有 數點折點之伽瑪曲線轉換電路進行。如圖126所示,不抑制 電流I時之折點為1261a、1261b…126lh。相對地,設置為 了使資料如同1262a、1262b··· 1262h減少之點。以電流之抑 制值1264分解連結此分別之折點之線並再結線,以便可產 生如同1263之伽瑪曲線,維持輸出資料相對於輸入資料之 比例而可將全體資料一律地削減。因為1262a、1262b… 1262h為0時,僅需以控制值除以1261a、1261b...l261h之 值即可,因此1262a、1262b··· 1262h之值宜為0。然而,本 發明不將1262a、1262b…1262h之值限定在〇,假設將 1262a、1262b." 1262h 之值設定在 1261a、1261b··· 1261h 之 值之1 /2,無論進行任何控制,能以電流值僅下降至1 /2為止 94992-961016.doc -88- 1295792 之方式進行限定。 如前述,藉由削減資料本身 率之抑制… 枓本身之電机抑制法係比控制亮燈 之抑制法具有防止元件劣化之效果 減之邻八脸冰1士 仁具有1料本身削 ^ 將使可表現的灰度範圍減少之缺點。又,如前 控制亮燈率之抑制法具有由於成為間歇驅動,動畫性 二升之優點,亦可維持灰度性’因此關於顯示影像,控 冗燈率之抑制方法較優異。 因此’本發明提案一種如同圖127所示,藉由將亮燈率控 到:定抑制量為止,進行電流量之抑制,其以後之抑制 里係精由縮小資料本身而抑制電流量之驅動。圖127之波形 為例。於圖127,電流抑制量到1/2為止係藉由控制亮燈 率而控制,而且剩下之1/2到1/4為止之抑制係藉由抑制資料 本身,將f流量抑制到1/4為止。由於資料削減至1/2為止, 因此假設資料以8位元表現時,僅能表現7位元分的灰度表 現但基本上咼壳燈區域之每1像素之資料量大,為難以判 斷灰度性之區域,因此減少灰度並不具缺點。進行此驅動 時,在顯示焭燈率100%之白光澤之情況,相較於僅於發光 期間控制之情況,雖然電流量一樣,但瞬間流入像素的電 流量成為1 /2,因此可2倍以上防止元件劣化。 於圖128表示為了實現本發明之電路構成。於1281,具有 運算由外部輸入之資料,判斷影像狀態之構成。丨282係具 有藉由1281所輸出之資料控制電流量之構成,1283具有產 生伽瑪曲線之構成。於1283產生之伽瑪曲線輸入伽瑪轉換 電路1284。輸入資料RGB係於此伽瑪曲線1284轉換,並輸 94992-961016.doc -89- 1295792 入源極驅動器14。1285係具有將1282之輸出分配給亮燈水 平掃描線數控制及伽瑪曲線控制之構成。亮燈水平掃描線 數之控制值輸入閘極驅動器12,伽瑪曲線之控制值輸入 1283,假設1282之輸出係將全體電流量控制在1/4者,屆 時’於1285,將亮燈水平掃描線數控制在1/2而進行轉換, 並且將伽瑪曲線控制在1/2而進行轉換。藉此,全體電流量 成為1 /4。藉由在12 8 5改變分配給亮燈水平掃描線數控制及 伽瑪曲線控制之比例,亦可實現各種電流抑制方法。 又,亦有削減基準電流量之方法,以取代削減資料本身。 採用此方法時,如前述具有浮游電容所造成之寫入不足的 問題,但技術上為可能。又,電路構成變得複雜,但亦可 與削減資料本身之方法或控制亮燈水平掃描線數之方法組 合使用。 本發明内容可適應於為了驅動顯示裝置之控制器IC,控 制器1C亦包含具有高度運算機能之DSP,而且亦包含FPGA。 圖34為本實施型態之觀景器之剖面圖。但為了容易說明 而模式性地描寫,而且存在一部分放大或縮小之處,且易 有省略之處。例如··於圖34,省略接眼蓋。以上事項亦適 用於其他圖式。 機身344之背面為暗色或黑色,此係為了防止由el顯示面 板(顯示裝置)出射之迷光在機身344之内面亂反射,造成顯 示對比下降。又,於顯示面板之光出射側配置相位板(又/4 板等)1〇8、偏光板109等。 於接眼環341安裝放大鏡342,觀察者可變化接眼環341 94992-961〇i6.d〇c -90- 1295792 在機身344内之插入位置,進行調整以使顯示面板345之顯 示圖像50具有焦點。 又,右按照需要,將正透鏡343配置於顯示面板345之光 出射側,可聚集入射於放大鏡342之主光線,因此可縮小放 大鏡342之透鏡直徑,使觀景器小型化。 圖52為攝影機之立體圖。攝影機具備攝影(攝像)透鏡部 552及攝影機本體344,攝影透鏡部及觀景器部係背 面相對’又’觀景器(亦參考圖34)344安裝有接眼蓋。觀察 者(使用者)由此接眼蓋部,觀察顯示面板345之圖向50。 鲁 另方面,本發明之EL顯示面板亦作為顯示監視器而使 用,顯示部5〇係利用支點52卜可自由言周整角度。不使用顯 示部50時,收納於收納部523。 開關524係實施以下機能之切換或控制開關。開關似係 』丁模式切換開關,開關524亦適於安裝於行動電話等。說 明有關此顯示模式切換開關524。 以上切換動作係用於行動電話、監視器等之電源開啟 時’顯示畫面50非常明亮地顯示,經過一定時間之後,為# 了節省電路’使顯示亮度降低之構成。又,亦可作為設定 在使用者希望之亮度之機能而使用。例如:於屋外等,使 旦面非书明免’因為在屋外由於周邊明亮,畫面完全看不 見。然而’持續以高亮度顯示的話,虹元件15將急速劣化, 因此使非常明亮之愔、、F ^ . 、 儿之^况,在紐時間内回復到通常亮度而構 ^並且在以南党度顯示時,使用者藉由按下按知而可提 94992-961016.doc -91- 1295792 因此,宜使使用者能以開關(按紐)524而切換,或者能以 設定模式自動變更,或檢測外光而自動切換而構成。又, 宜使使用者等可將顯示亮度設定在寫、6g%、8g%而構成。 再者’顯示晝面50宜為高斯分佈顯示,所謂高斯分佈顯 示,其係中央部之亮度亮,周邊部較暗之方式。在視覺上, 只要中央部明亮,即使周邊部暗,仍感到明亮。根據主觀 評價’相較於中央部,周邊部只要保持7〇%的亮度,在視 覺上不會遜色’進-步減低為5〇%的亮度,亦大致不構成 問題。 再者,高斯分佈顯示宜設置可開啟、關閉之切換開關, 例如:在屋外若進行高斯顯示,畫面周邊將完全看不見, 因此宜使使用者能以按鈕切換、以設定模式自動變更、或 檢測外光焭度而自動切換而構成。又,宜使使用者等可將 顯示亮度設定在50%、60%、80%而構成。 液晶顯示面板係以背光產生固定之高斯分佈,因此無法 開啟、關閉高斯分佈,能開啟、關閉高斯分佈的是自我發 光型顯示裝置特有的效果。 # 又,幀率(Frame Rate)為特定時,可能會與室内之螢光燈 等之亮燈狀態干擾,產生閃爍的情況。亦即,螢光燈在6〇 Hz 之交點亮燈時,若有機EL元件15在幀率60 Hz動作,將發生 微妙的干擾,會有感到晝面緩慢亮暗之情況。為了避免此, 變更幀率即可。本發明係附加幀率的變更機能。 以開關524實現以上機能。開關524係按照顯示畫面50之 功能表,抑制複數次,以便可實現以上說明之機能之切換。 94992-961016.doc -92- 1295792 再者’以上事項不僅限於行動電話,當然亦可適用於電 視、監視器。又,為了使使用者能立即認識處於何種狀態, 宜於顯示晝面上以圖式q 、 一 口八Ucon)顯不。以上事項對於以下事項 亦相同。 本實施型態之EL顯示梦署| 1 > 貝不展置荨不僅可適用於攝影機,亦可 適用於圖5 3所示之電子相擔 、 <电于相栈、數位相機等。顯示裝置係作 為附屬於相機本體5 3 1之於:¾盟< Λ a ^ 之皿視态50使用。除了快門533以 外’於相機本體531安裝有開關524。 以上係顯示面板之顯示區域較小型之情況,但若成為 才以上之大型,顯不畫面5〇容易陷下,為了其對策,本發 明係如圖54所示,於顯示面板加裝外框541,並安裝固定構 件544,以便可懸吊外框541。採用此固定構件544,安裝於 牆壁等。 然而,顯示面板的畫面尺寸變大,重量亦變重,因此, 於顯示面板之下側配置腳安裝部543,能以複數腳542保持 顯示面板之重量。 如A所示,腳542可左右移動,而且腳542係如B所示,可 收縮而構成’因此即使在狹窄場所,仍可容易設置。 於圖54之電視,覆蓋保護畫面表面之保護膜(保護板亦 可),此係以防止物體觸及顯示面板表面而破損為目的之 一。於保護膜之表面形成AI-R膜,或者藉由將表面雕刻加 工’以抑制顯示面板印入外部狀況(外光)。 藉由於保護膜及顯示面板間,散佈珠狀物等,以便配置 有一定空間而形成。又,於保護膜之背面形成微細凸部, 94992-961016.doc -93- 1295792 以此凸^在顯τ面板與保護膜間保持$間。冑由如此保持 空間,抑制來自保護膜之衝擊傳達到顯示面板。 於保屢膜與顯示面板間,配置或注入乙醇、乙二醇 等液體或勝狀之丙烯酸樹脂或環氧樹脂等固體樹脂等之光 結合劑,亦具有效果。因為可防止界面反射,同時前述光 結合劑作為緩衝材料而作用。 作為保護膜,例示聚碳酸酯膜(板)、聚丙烯膜(板)、丙烯 酸膜(板)、聚酯膜(板)、PVA膜(板)等。當然亦可使用其他 工私樹脂膜(ABS等)。又m玻璃等無機材料所組成者亦 可。用以取代配置保護膜,以環氧樹脂、紛樹月旨、丙稀酸 樹脂,將顯示面板表面以〇·5 mm以上、2〇 mm以下之厚度 覆膜’亦有同樣效果。X,於此等樹脂表面進行雕刻加工 等亦有效。 又’由於可容易將沾附於表面之污垢,以清潔劑拭去, 因此於保護膜或覆膜材料表面施加氣膜亦有效果。又,較 厚形成保護膜,與前光兼用亦可。 於本發明之實施例之顯示面板可與3邊開放之構成組合 亦有效,特別在3邊開放構成係像素採用非晶矽技術製作時 有效。又,以非晶矽技術形成之面板,由於不可能進行電 晶體元件之特性變動之製程控制,因此宜實施本發明 倍脈衝驅動、重設驅動、假像素驅動等。總言之,本發明 之電晶體11等’不限定於藉由多晶矽技術者,#由非晶矽 技術者亦可。總言之,於本發明之顯示面板,構成像素16 之電晶體11亦可為採用非晶矽技術所形成之電晶體。又, 94992-961016.doc •94· 1295792 當然閘極驅動器12、源極驅動器14亦可採用非晶矽技術形 成或構成。 本發明之實施例所說明之技術思想可適用於攝影機、投 影機、立體電視、投影電視等。又,亦可適用於觀景器、 行動電話之監視器、PHS、攜帶式資訊終端裝置及其監視 器、數位相機及其監視器。 又’亦可適用於電子相片系統、頭盎顯示器(Head M〇unt Display)、直視監視器顯示器、筆記型個人電腦、攝影機、 電子數位相機。又,現金自動提款機之監視器、公共電話、 電視電話、個人電腦、手錶及其顯示裝置。 並且,當然亦可應用或展開應用於家電機器之顯示監視 、口袋型遊戲機器及其監視器、顯示面板用背光或家庭 用或業務用之照明裝置等。照明裝置宜可變化色溫而構 成。此係將RGB之像素形成條紋狀或點矩陣狀,藉由調整 流入其等之電流而可變更色溫。又,亦可應用於廣告或海 報等之顯示裝置、rgb之信號器、警報顯示燈等。 又,作為掃描器之光源,有機£乙顯示面板亦有效。將Rgb 之點矩陣作為光源,把光照射於對象物而讀取圖像。當然, 單色亦可。又,不限定於主動矩陣,單純矩陣亦可,若可 調整色溫,圖像讀取精度亦提升。 又,有機EL顯不裝置亦對於液晶顯示裝置之背光有效。 將EL顯示裝置(背光)之RGB之像素形成條紋狀或點矩陣 狀,藉由調整流入其等之電流而可變更色溫,而且亦可調 整壳度。此外,由於是面光源,因此容易構成使晝面之中 94992-961016.doc -95- 1295792 :=、周邊部暗之高斯分佈。又, 又互知描之場序列方式之液晶顯示面 B先 又,即使背光亮暗,藉由進行黑插入 月光亦有效。 等之液晶顯示面板之背光使用。 ’、可作為動晝顯示 自=本:-:之:式係為了藉由電腦執行上述本發明之 目我^先顯不裝置之驅動電路 ^ 置、元件等)之機能,與電猫共同作用=部分手段(或展 又,本發明之程式係為了藉由:::動作之程式。 Γ:=置:動方法之全部或部分步_工序、I 又=與電腦共同作用而動作之程式。 發明之自::?己錄媒體係擔持為1藉由電腦執行上述本 ;/置=顯示裝置之驅動電路之全部或部分手: 取之前述程❹電㈣電腦讀取,並且讀 體。 I電…作用而執行前述機能之記錄媒 發明之、由電腦執行上述本 (或工序、動祚 之驅動方法之全部或部分步驟 l且讀取之:乍用等)之動作之程式,可藉由電腦讀取, 錄㈣迷程式與電腦共同作用而執行前述機能之記From time to time, the clear image of the wheel gallery is clear. However, the black insertion rate by intermittently driving right k冋' has a problem that the image will appear to be flickering. In particular, in displays using organic EL elements, unlike liquid crystal displays, the speed (or vice versa) in white is faster, so the flicker will appear more pronounced. As a method of suppressing flicker, there is a circuit configuration in which a private knife is cut in black during a still image which is easily seen to be flickering due to a circuit configuration as shown in Fig. 85 or when the black insertion rate is extremely high. To suppress the flicker. In short, this driving method is in the case of an animation in which only one part of the screen is moved: , and black is inserted regardless of the result, so that flicker is generated. It is extremely difficult to correctly judge the display state of an image, and this driving method cannot solve this problem. Because of A, a driving method is proposed as shown in FIG. 112 'When the black insertion rate enters a region causing flicker or is taken over by a black insertion to suppress flicker, and by maintaining a black insertion interval. Improved animation performance. As described above, when the organic EL display is intermittently driven, it is controlled by controlling electricity. Moreover, the transistor 11 d is controlled by the 17b outputted by the gate boat 12, so in order to control the black insertion rate, as long as the control (7) is 94992-961016.doc • 83 - 1295792 can be 0 in the present invention The frame is divided into 8 segments, and black insertion control is performed in units of blocks. In order to divide one frame into eight, each division is 125% of one frame. The reason for setting it at 12.5% was that the condition that the black insertion caused the flicker was that the black insertion rate around 15% to 25% began to see flicker, and the flicker was noticeably seen from 25% to 5%. In order to prevent the black insertion rate of the visible flicker from being above, the block of 12.5% is set so that one black block does not exceed 12.5%. 4 The range of flashing can be changed due to the size of the display, the brightness of the light, the frequency of the image, etc., so that the black insertion rate of the flashing is small, and the work frame can be divided into 16 segments (6.75%). When the black insertion rate is high, it is also possible to divide 1 frame by 4 (25%). The divided places are numbered as shown in FIG. This number indicates the order in which the lights are illuminated by the number of horizontal scanning lines. If the frame is divided by 8 as described above, the numbers are added in the order of 〇, 4, 2, 6, 1, 5, 3, and 7 as shown in Fig. 113'. Control 17b to start lighting sequentially by the apostrophe. Conversely, starting from the 7th, it becomes a non-lighting state, that is, black insertion. If the 1131 ’ black insertion is between 〇% and 12.5%, the block on the 7th is not lit. For example, i 132, from i2.5% to 25%, the block 7 will remain in the non-lighting state, and (4) will be in the non-lighting state. By this driving method, the black block is kept at a certain amount, and black insertion is performed in other places, and the animation performance can be maintained while suppressing the flicker. Fig. 114 shows the construction of the electric circuit for realizing this drive. As an example, the 鸭 次 进行 is divided into two η powers. When the number of lighting horizontal scanning lines 114 is formed, the comparison between the high level η bit u43 of the lighting horizontal scanning line number 142 and the lighting order 1144 is obtained. The lighting sequence U44 will pass the value of the count state of the horizontal sync signal positive number 94992-961016.doc -84 - 1295792, the value of the count state of 1 1 4 1 through the output value of the converter 1 1 46. 1143 is 1144 hours longer than the lighting sequence, and the signal 1145 from the output of the gate signal line 17b is controlled to output LOW. At this time, when 1145 is LOW, the lid is turned off. When the lighting sequence 1144 is the same as 1143, the HI output of the lower (N-n) bit value of 1142 is performed. When 1143 is larger than 1144, Π45 performs HI output. If this is done, as shown in Fig. 113, when there is a black insertion rate of 12.5% or more, at least 12% of black insertion can be ensured in one section, and animation performance can be maintained by performing a certain amount of black insertion. Lift while preventing flicker. At this time, the numbering is best prevented from flickering as shown in FIG. 113, but the present invention is not limited to this order. After all, the black insertion is selected by simply comparing the number of the division period with the size of the control line of the number of horizontal scanning lines. The place. Further, as shown in Fig. 115, after the amount of animation performance can be improved, the method of carefully inserting black is also effective. In general, in order to improve the dynamic performance, it is necessary to insert more than 25% of black, and if black insertion is performed once in a region of more than 5%, it is easy to cause flashing, so from 〇% to 5%, Black insertion is performed once, and after 50%, it is particularly preferable to drive the black insertion in a manner that does not cause flashing. Further, the converter 1146 has a method of creating a table for selecting an output value for an input value, and a method of sequentially replacing the high-order and low-order conversion circuits as shown in Fig. 122. The latter approach has the advantage of reducing the size of the circuit. Figs. 116, 117, 118, 119, 12, and 121 are circuit constituents for detecting a still image without using a frame body as shown in Fig. 7i. By using this circuit, it is possible to detect a still image without enlarging the circuit scale. With this circuit, the residual image of the organic EL can be prevented. 94992-961016.doc -85- 1295792 As described above, the organic EL has a life caused by deterioration of the element. As a cause of deterioration of the element, the temperature around the element or the current flowing into the element itself can be exemplified. As described above, the organic EL element is increased in temperature in proportion to the amount of current. In the display device using the organic EL element, the organic element is disposed in each pixel. Therefore, as the current amount of the organic EL device disposed in each pixel increases, the EL element emits light, and the entire display temperature rises, resulting in deterioration of the element. . Therefore, in the case of the display using the organic EL element, it is necessary to suppress the current flowing into the organic EL element in the case where the amount of heat generated by the entire display is increased. As described above, as a method of suppressing the amount of current of the organic EL element, there is a method of controlling the light-emitting time of the organic EL element with respect to the input data as shown in FIG. By controlling the light-emitting time of the organic EL, the current amount is controlled, the amount of heat generation is reduced, and the life is improved. However, since the amount of current flowing into the organic EL element is also one of the causes of deterioration of the element, if the amount of current flowing into the element itself is reduced as shown in FIG. 123, the driving of the current 减少 of the entire display can be reduced, and the element can be further prevented. Deterioration. The method of suppressing the current amount of the inflow member itself is as long as the source driving is suppressed: 2, 4, in order to flow a current into the reference current line of the driving transistor Ua, the electric current can be made. As means for suppressing the amount of current of the reference current line 629, there is a method in which the resistor for making the voltage of the reference power source line 636 becomes a variable resistor and operates as the resistance itself. Further, as shown in Fig. 62, in the source driver, the electron amount 625 which is the operation reference current, and the operation electron amount 625, Fig. 124 shows the circuit configuration in which the amount of electrons is used to control the amount of current. The circuit 1241 of the total display display data determines the image data, and inputs a current 94992-961 〇i6.d < 1295792 suppression circuit 1242. The current suppression circuit is a circuit for calculating the lighting rate as in 550, or a circuit having a delay circuit as in 612, or a circuit for suppressing the horizontal scanning line number of the current from the input data. The electronic quantity control circuit 1244 can be controlled by switching the signal line for controlling the number of scanning horizontal scanning lines by the switching circuit 1243 without controlling the number of scanning lines of the lighting level and controlling the amount of current by the electronic quantity. Further, at this time, by controlling the signal line 1245 of the current suppression method in the electronic quantity control circuit (conversion circuit) 1244 so as to scan the line number or the electron amount in the lighting level, the control current amount can be formed. The circuit is constructed. 0 However, the method of suppressing the reference current by the amount of electrons or the like and suppressing the amount of current has disadvantages. As will be described, the floating capacitor 45 is present in the source signal line 丨8. In order to change the source signal line voltage, the charge of the floating capacitor must be pulled out. The time Δ T taken for this pull-out is Δ Q (the charge of the floating capacitor) = 1 (the current flowing into the source signal line) χ Δ Τ = (: (floating capacitance value) χ Δν. Since the gradation is lower, the value becomes The smaller the size, the more difficult it is to pull out the charge of the floating capacitor 451. Therefore, the problem of changing the signal before the specific party degree into the inside of the pixel is more apparent in the _low gradation display. Therefore, if the amount of electrons is used to suppress the reference current amount When the low gradation is not displayed, the above problem occurs more prominently, so it is difficult to maintain gradation in the low gradation portion. Therefore, the present invention proposes to convert the input data itself as shown in FIG. The method of reducing the amount of current to reduce the amount of current. Since the gradation of the data is reduced, the gradation of the gradation becomes small, but in the low gradation portion, since the output of the source driver 14 itself does not become small, the above Floating 94092-961016.doc -87- 1295792 The writes caused by the travel capacitors disappeared. However, the amount of data is reduced, that is, the Thundering 流入 流入 into the organic EL element Small, so it can prevent components from being inferior The small amount of fine bait can also be reduced by the maximum gray scale. As shown in Figure 125, the maximum gray level is reduced from X to χ/4' by the total amount of input data. The amount is suppressed to 1/4. η" is a graph showing the other gradations when the maximum number of gradations is reduced. By reducing the maximum gradation to 1/4, the intermediate gradation to the same is also reduced. Therefore, generally, the difference in current amount per gradation of the gradation system is increased, so if the image is displayed with a small degree of redundancy, a problem of seeing a contour is generated. However, the maximum gray is driven by this. Although the degree is reduced, the amount of current per gradation does not change, so even if the number of gradations is reduced, the pseudo contour is not generated. As a method of reducing the amount of data, there is a conversion of the input data by the conversion shown in FIG. The method of performing the gamma curve is performed by using a gamma curve conversion circuit having a plurality of vertices. As shown in Fig. 126, the vertices when the current I is not suppressed are 1261a, 1261b...126lh. Set in order to make the data like 1262a, 1262b··· 12 62h reduction point. The current suppression value 1264 is decomposed and connected to the line of the respective vertices and re-wired, so that a gamma curve like 1263 can be generated, and the ratio of the output data to the input data can be maintained, and the entire data can be uniformly Since 1262a, 1262b...1262h is 0, it is only necessary to divide the control value by the value of 1261a, 1261b...l261h, so the value of 1262a, 1262b···1262h is preferably 0. However, the present invention does not Limit the value of 1262a, 1262b...1262h to 〇, assuming that the value of 1262a, 1262b." 1262h is set to 1 /2 of the value of 1261a, 1261b··· 1261h, and the current value can only be decreased regardless of any control. The method is limited to 1 /2, 94992-961016.doc -88- 1295792. As mentioned above, by suppressing the suppression of the rate of the data itself... The motor suppression method of the 枓 itself has the effect of preventing the deterioration of the component by the suppression method of controlling the lighting, and the neighboring eight-face ice 1 士仁 has 1 material itself. The disadvantage of the reduced gray scale range that can be expressed. Further, the suppression method for controlling the lighting rate as before has the advantage of being an intermittent driving and having an animated two liters, and the gradation can be maintained. Therefore, the method of suppressing the control of the lamp rate is excellent in displaying images. Therefore, the present invention proposes a method of suppressing the amount of current by controlling the lighting rate until the amount of suppression is controlled as shown in Fig. 127, and thereafter suppresses the driving of suppressing the amount of current by reducing the data itself. The waveform of Figure 127 is taken as an example. In Fig. 127, the current suppression amount is controlled by controlling the lighting rate until 1/2, and the remaining 1/2 to 1/4 of the suppression suppresses the f flow rate to 1/1 by suppressing the data itself. 4 so far. Since the data is reduced to 1/2, it is assumed that the data is expressed in octaves, and only the gradation of 7-bits can be expressed. However, the amount of data per pixel of the clamshell lamp area is large, making it difficult to judge gray. The area of the degree, so reducing the gray level is not a disadvantage. When this driving is performed, in the case of displaying the white gloss of 100% of the xenon lamp rate, the amount of current flowing into the pixel instantaneously becomes 1 /2, which is 2 times as compared with the case of controlling only during the lighting period, although the amount of current is the same. The above prevents deterioration of the element. Fig. 128 shows the circuit configuration for realizing the present invention. In 1281, it has a structure for calculating the state of the image by calculating the data input from the outside. The 丨282 has a configuration that controls the amount of current by the data output from 1281, and 1283 has a gamma curve. The gamma curve generated at 1283 is input to the gamma conversion circuit 1284. The input data RGB is converted by this gamma curve 1284, and input 94092-961016.doc -89-1295792 into the source driver 14. The 1285 system has the output of 1282 assigned to the lighting horizontal scanning line number control and gamma curve control The composition. The control value of the number of horizontal scanning lines is input to the gate driver 12, and the control value of the gamma curve is input to 1283. It is assumed that the output of 1282 controls the total current amount to 1/4, and then at 1285, the horizontal scanning is performed. The number of lines is controlled to be converted at 1/2, and the gamma curve is controlled at 1/2 for conversion. Thereby, the total current amount is 1/4. Various current suppression methods can also be realized by changing the ratio of the horizontal scanning line number control and the gamma curve control assigned to the lighting level at 12 8 5 . In addition, there is also a method of reducing the amount of reference current instead of reducing the data itself. When this method is employed, there is a problem of insufficient writing due to the floating capacitance as described above, but it is technically possible. Further, the circuit configuration is complicated, but it can also be used in combination with a method of reducing the data itself or a method of controlling the number of horizontal scanning lines. The present invention is applicable to a controller IC for driving a display device, and the controller 1C also includes a DSP having a high computing function, and also includes an FPGA. Figure 34 is a cross-sectional view of the viewfinder of the present embodiment. However, it is schematically described for ease of explanation, and there is a part of enlargement or reduction, and it is easy to omit. For example, in Fig. 34, the eye cover is omitted. The above matters are also applicable to other drawings. The back surface of the body 344 is dark or black, in order to prevent the fog emitted from the el display panel (display device) from being reflected on the inner surface of the body 344, causing a decrease in display contrast. Further, a phase plate (again/four plates, etc.) 1〇8, a polarizing plate 109, and the like are disposed on the light emitting side of the display panel. The magnifying glass 342 is mounted on the eyelet ring 341, and the observer can change the insertion position of the eyelet ring 341 94992-961〇i6.d〇c -90-1295792 in the body 344 to adjust so that the display image 50 of the display panel 345 has focus. Further, the right lens 343 is disposed on the light exit side of the display panel 345 as needed, and the main ray incident on the magnifying glass 342 can be collected. Therefore, the lens diameter of the magnifying mirror 342 can be reduced, and the viewfinder can be miniaturized. Figure 52 is a perspective view of the camera. The camera includes a photographing (imaging) lens unit 552 and a camera main body 344, and an eye contact cover is attached to the rear side of the photographing lens unit and the viewfinder unit (see also Fig. 34). The observer (user) thereby picks up the cover and observes the orientation 50 of the display panel 345. In another aspect, the EL display panel of the present invention is also used as a display monitor, and the display unit 5 can use the fulcrum 52 to freely define the angle. When the display unit 50 is not used, it is stored in the storage unit 523. Switch 524 implements the switching or control of the following functions. The switch is similar to the "mode" switch, and the switch 524 is also suitable for installation in a mobile phone or the like. The display mode switch 524 is explained. The above switching operation is used when the power of the mobile phone or the monitor is turned on. The display screen 50 is displayed very brightly, and after a certain period of time, the saving circuit is made to reduce the display brightness. Further, it can be used as a function of setting the brightness desired by the user. For example, if you are outside the house, you will be exempted from the book because the outside is bright outside and the picture is completely invisible. However, if the display is continued with high brightness, the rainbow element 15 will rapidly deteriorate, so that it is very bright, F ^ , and the condition of the child, returning to the normal brightness during the time and constructing it in the south. When displayed, the user can lift 94992-961016.doc -91- 1295792 by pressing the button. Therefore, the user should be able to switch with the switch (button 524), or can be automatically changed in the setting mode, or detected. External light is automatically switched to form. Further, it is preferable that the user or the like can set the display brightness to write, 6 g%, and 8 g%. Further, the display surface 50 is preferably a Gaussian distribution display, and the Gaussian distribution is a mode in which the brightness of the central portion is bright and the peripheral portion is dark. Visually, as long as the central part is bright, even if the peripheral part is dark, it still feels bright. According to the subjective evaluation, as long as the peripheral portion maintains a brightness of 7〇% as compared with the central portion, it is visually inferior to the brightness of the step-down of 5〇%, which does not substantially pose a problem. Furthermore, the Gaussian distribution display should be provided with a switch that can be turned on and off. For example, if Gaussian display is performed outside the house, the periphery of the screen will be completely invisible, so the user should be able to switch with the button, automatically change in the setting mode, or detect. The external light is automatically switched and configured. Further, it is preferable that the user or the like can set the display brightness to 50%, 60%, or 80%. The liquid crystal display panel generates a fixed Gaussian distribution by the backlight, so that the Gaussian distribution cannot be turned on and off, and the Gaussian distribution can be turned on and off, which is a characteristic of the self-luminous display device. # Further, when the frame rate is specified, it may interfere with the lighting status of the indoor fluorescent lamp, etc., and flicker may occur. In other words, when the fluorescent lamp is turned on at 6 Hz, if the organic EL element 15 operates at a frame rate of 60 Hz, subtle interference will occur, and the surface may be slow and dark. To avoid this, change the frame rate. The present invention is a function of changing the additional frame rate. The above functions are realized by the switch 524. The switch 524 is activated in accordance with the function table of the display screen 50, so that the switching of the functions described above can be realized. 94992-961016.doc -92- 1295792 Furthermore, the above matters are not limited to mobile phones, and of course can also be applied to televisions and monitors. Moreover, in order to enable the user to immediately recognize what state is in the state, it is preferable to display the figure q, one port eight Ucon). The above matters are the same for the following items. This embodiment of the EL display dreams | 1 > Be not display can be applied not only to the camera, but also to the electronic phase shown in Figure 5, <electrical stack, digital camera. The display device is used as a device view 50 attached to the camera body 5 3 1 . A switch 524 is attached to the camera body 531 except for the shutter 533. In the above, the display area of the panel is small, but if it is larger than the above, the screen 5 is easily trapped. For the countermeasure, the present invention is as shown in FIG. 54 and the outer frame 541 is attached to the display panel. And fixing member 544 is installed so that outer frame 541 can be suspended. This fixing member 544 is attached to a wall or the like. However, since the screen size of the display panel is increased and the weight is also increased, the foot mounting portion 543 is disposed on the lower side of the display panel, and the weight of the display panel can be maintained by the plurality of legs 542. As shown in A, the foot 542 can be moved left and right, and the foot 542 is formed as shown in B, and can be contracted to constitute 'so that it can be easily set even in a narrow place. The television of Fig. 54 covers a protective film (protective plate) for protecting the surface of the screen, which is one of the objects for preventing the object from coming into contact with the surface of the display panel. An AI-R film is formed on the surface of the protective film, or by engraving the surface to suppress the display panel from being printed on an external condition (outer light). It is formed by dispersing beads or the like between the protective film and the display panel so as to be arranged with a certain space. Further, a fine convex portion is formed on the back surface of the protective film, and 94992-961016.doc -93- 1295792 is held between the display τ panel and the protective film. By keeping the space in this way, the impact from the protective film is suppressed from being transmitted to the display panel. It is also effective to arrange or inject a liquid binder such as a liquid such as ethanol or ethylene glycol or a solid resin such as an acrylic resin or an epoxy resin between the film and the display panel. This is because the interface reflection can be prevented while the aforementioned photo-binding agent acts as a buffer material. As the protective film, a polycarbonate film (plate), a polypropylene film (plate), an acrylic film (plate), a polyester film (plate), a PVA film (plate), and the like are exemplified. Of course, other proprietary resin films (ABS, etc.) can also be used. Also, it is also possible to form an inorganic material such as m glass. In place of the protective film, the same effect can be obtained by coating the surface of the display panel with a thickness of 〇·5 mm or more and 2 mm or less in an epoxy resin, a scented resin, or an acrylic resin. X, such as engraving on the surface of such a resin, is also effective. Further, since the dirt adhering to the surface can be easily wiped off with the detergent, it is also effective to apply a gas film on the surface of the protective film or the film material. Further, a protective film is formed thicker and can be used together with the front light. The display panel of the embodiment of the present invention can also be combined with the three-sided open structure, and is particularly effective when the three-side open structure pixel is fabricated by an amorphous germanium technique. Further, in a panel formed by an amorphous germanium technique, since it is impossible to control the process of changing the characteristics of the crystal element, it is preferable to implement the double pulse driving, the reset driving, the dummy pixel driving, and the like of the present invention. In summary, the transistor 11 and the like of the present invention are not limited to those by the polysilicon technology, and may be made by an amorphous germanium technique. In summary, in the display panel of the present invention, the transistor 11 constituting the pixel 16 can also be a transistor formed by an amorphous germanium technique. Further, 94992-961016.doc • 94· 1295792 Of course, the gate driver 12 and the source driver 14 may also be formed or constructed using an amorphous germanium technique. The technical idea described in the embodiments of the present invention can be applied to a camera, a projector, a stereoscopic television, a projection television, and the like. Also, it can be applied to a viewfinder, a mobile phone monitor, a PHS, a portable information terminal device and its monitor, a digital camera, and a monitor thereof. It can also be applied to electronic photo systems, Head M〇unt Display, direct-view monitor displays, notebook PCs, cameras, and electronic digital cameras. Also, a cash dispenser, a public telephone, a television telephone, a personal computer, a watch, and a display device thereof. Further, of course, it is also possible to apply or develop display monitors for home electric appliances, pocket game machines and monitors thereof, backlights for display panels, lighting devices for home use or business use, and the like. The lighting device should preferably be constructed to vary color temperature. In this case, pixels of RGB are formed in a stripe shape or a dot matrix shape, and the color temperature can be changed by adjusting the current flowing into it. Further, it can be applied to display devices such as advertisements and posters, rgb annunciators, alarm display lamps, and the like. Moreover, as a light source of the scanner, the organic display panel is also effective. A dot matrix of Rgb is used as a light source, and light is irradiated onto an object to read an image. Of course, monochrome is also available. Further, it is not limited to the active matrix, and a simple matrix is also possible. If the color temperature can be adjusted, the image reading accuracy is also improved. Further, the organic EL display device is also effective for the backlight of the liquid crystal display device. The pixels of RGB of the EL display device (backlight) are formed in a stripe shape or a dot matrix shape, and the color temperature can be changed by adjusting the current flowing in, etc., and the shell degree can be adjusted. In addition, since it is a surface light source, it is easy to form a Gaussian distribution in the peripheral portion of 94992-961016.doc -95 - 1295792 :=. Further, the liquid crystal display surface B of the field sequential method is also known to be effective in black insertion of the moonlight even if the backlight is bright and dark. The backlight of the liquid crystal display panel is used. ', can be used as a dynamic display from = this: -: it: in order to perform the above-mentioned functions of the present invention by computer, the function of the drive circuit, components, etc. of the first display device, and the electric cat = Part of the means (or exhibition, the program of the present invention is for::: the program of action. Γ: = set: all or part of the method of the step _ process, I and = the program that works together with the computer. The invention is: The recording of the media is carried out by the computer to execute the above-mentioned book; / set = all or part of the driving circuit of the display device: Take the aforementioned process (4) computer reading, and reading the body. a program for performing the above-described functions of the recording medium, which is operated by a computer, and which is executed by a computer (or all or part of the steps of the driving method of the process, and the reading: 乍, etc.) Read by computer, recorded (4) the program and the computer work together to perform the aforementioned functions

再者,本發明$卜、+、Γ A 意味於其等複艾2段(或裝置、元件等)」係 「部分步驟(或工彳之1個或數個手段,本發明之上述 内之!個或數個步i作、作用等)」係意味其等複數步驟 94992-961016.doc -96- 1295792 立又义本么明之上述「手段(或裝置、元件等)之機能」係 意味前述手段之全部或部分機能,本發明之上述「步驟(或 序動作作用專)之動作」係意味前述步驟之全部或部 分動作。 本么月之私式之-利用·態亦可記錄於可藉由電腦 讀取之記錄媒體,與電料同作心動作之態樣。 又♦本發明之程式之一利用型態亦可傳送於傳送媒體 中,藉由電腦讀取,與電腦共同作用而動作之態樣。 又’記錄媒體包含R0M等,作為傳送媒體,包含網路等 傳送媒體、光•電波•音波等 又,上述本發明之電腦不限於CPU等純然硬體,亦可包 含韌體或0S、甚至周邊機器。 再者如以上況明,本發明之構成亦可f| & g& g 【產業上之利用可能性】 本發明係顯示圖像之亮度若高,減少流入面板之電流 里儿度右低則i日加電流量,則更持續保護有機元件或 電池,使像素全體明亮,因此實用效果大。 又’本發明之顯示面板、顯示裝置等係因應高畫質、良 好動畫顯示、低耗雷、如:A、士 π 古丄士 - 电低成本化、同壳度化等之分別之構 成’發揮具有特徵的效果。 再者,採用本發明的話,可構成低耗電之資訊顯示裝置 等,因此隸電,而且可小型輕量化,因此不耗費資源。 又’即使疋局精細之顯示面板,仍可充分對應,因此對於 94992-961016.doc -97- 1295792 地球環境、宇宙環境和善。 【圖式簡單說明】 圖1為本發明之顯示面板之像素構成圖。 圖2為本發明之顯示面板之像素構成圖。 圖3(a)、(b)係表示本發明之驅動時之流程圖。 圖4係表示本發明之驅動波形之圖。 Θ 5(a)、(b)為本發明之顯示面板之顯示區域之說明。 圖6為本發明之顯示面板之像素構成圖。 圖7為本發明之顯示面板之製造方法之說明圖。 圖8為本發明之面板之構成圖。 圖9係說明有關源極信號線及閘極信號線間之浮 之圖。 /電容 圖10為本發明之顯示面板之剖面圖。 圖11為本發明之顯示面板之剖面圖。 圖12為源極線之電流量與面板亮度之關係圖。 圖13(a)、(b)為顯示面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖14係表示本發明之驅動波形之圖。 圖15係表示本發明之驅動波形之圖。 周16(a)、(b)為顯示面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖17係表示本發明之驅動波形之圖。 圖18係表示本發明之驅動波形之圖。 圖19(al)〜(c3)為顯示面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖20(a)、(b)為顯示面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖21係表示本發明之驅動波形之圖。 94992-961016.doc -98- 1295792 圖22(a)、(b)為顯示面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖23係表示本發明之驅動波形之圖。 圖24為像素構成與電池之關係圖。 圖25為顯示區域亮度與電流量之關係圖。 圖26為本發明之輸入資料與電流量之關係圖。 圖27為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖28為亮燈率控制驅動適用時之顯示區域之亮度與電流 量之關係圖。Furthermore, the present invention, $b, +, ΓA, means that the two stages (or devices, components, etc.) of the remedy are "partial steps (or one or several means of the work, the above-mentioned ones of the present invention) "After a few steps, a function, etc." means that the above-mentioned plural steps 94092-961016.doc -96- 1295792 and the above-mentioned "functions of means (or devices, components, etc.)" mean the foregoing The "step (or sequence action)" of the present invention means all or part of the actions of the foregoing steps. The private-use state of this month can also be recorded in a recording medium that can be read by a computer, and the same as the electric material. Moreover, one of the programs of the present invention can also be transmitted to a transmission medium, and is read by a computer to interact with a computer to operate. Further, the recording medium includes a ROM, etc., and includes a transmission medium such as a network, a light wave, a sound wave, and the like as the transmission medium. The computer of the present invention is not limited to a hardware such as a CPU, and may include a firmware or an OS or even a periphery. machine. Furthermore, as described above, the composition of the present invention can also be f| &g& g [Industrial Applicability] The present invention shows that if the brightness of the image is high, the current flowing into the panel is reduced to the right. When the amount of current is applied to the day, the organic component or the battery is more continuously protected, and the entire pixel is bright, so that the practical effect is large. Further, the display panel and the display device of the present invention are composed of high image quality, good animation display, low lightning consumption, such as: A, Shi π Gu Shishi - low cost, and the same shell. Play a characteristic effect. Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to constitute a low-power consumption information display device or the like, and therefore it is possible to reduce power and size, and therefore it does not consume resources. Moreover, even if the display panel of the fine-grained display panel is fully compatible, it is good for the 94992-961016.doc -97- 1295792 earth environment and the cosmic environment. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Fig. 1 is a view showing a pixel configuration of a display panel of the present invention. 2 is a view showing a pixel configuration of a display panel of the present invention. 3(a) and 3(b) are flowcharts showing the driving of the present invention. Fig. 4 is a view showing a driving waveform of the present invention. Θ 5(a) and (b) are descriptions of display areas of the display panel of the present invention. Fig. 6 is a view showing the configuration of a pixel of a display panel of the present invention. Fig. 7 is an explanatory view showing a method of manufacturing a display panel of the present invention. Figure 8 is a block diagram of a panel of the present invention. Fig. 9 is a view showing the relationship between the source signal line and the gate signal line. / Capacitance Figure 10 is a cross-sectional view of the display panel of the present invention. Figure 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a display panel of the present invention. Figure 12 is a graph showing the relationship between the amount of current of the source line and the brightness of the panel. 13(a) and 13(b) are explanatory views of the display state of the display panel. Fig. 14 is a view showing a driving waveform of the present invention. Fig. 15 is a view showing a driving waveform of the present invention. Weeks 16(a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams of the display state of the display panel. Fig. 17 is a view showing a driving waveform of the present invention. Fig. 18 is a view showing the driving waveform of the present invention. 19(a1) to (c3) are explanatory views of the display state of the display panel. 20(a) and (b) are explanatory views of the display state of the display panel. Figure 21 is a diagram showing the driving waveform of the present invention. 94992-961016.doc -98- 1295792 Fig. 22 (a) and (b) are explanatory views of the display state of the display panel. Figure 23 is a view showing the driving waveform of the present invention. Figure 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pixel configuration and the battery. Figure 25 is a graph showing the relationship between the brightness of the area and the amount of current. Figure 26 is a graph showing the relationship between input data and current amount in the present invention. Figure 27 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Fig. 28 is a graph showing the relationship between the brightness and the amount of current in the display area when the lighting rate control drive is applied.

圖29為亮燈率控制驅動之控制方法圖。 圖30為亮燈率控制驅動之控制方法圖。 圖31為亮燈率與亮度之關係圖。 圓彳糸表示本發明之驅動波形之圖。 圖33係表不根據本發明所修正之亮燈率與亮度關係圖 圖34為本發明之觀景器之說明圖。 圖35為本發明之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖36係說明有關與源極信號絲合之圖。Fig. 29 is a diagram showing a control method of the lighting rate control drive. Fig. 30 is a diagram showing a control method of the lighting rate control drive. Figure 31 is a graph showing the relationship between the lighting rate and the brightness. A circle represents a diagram of the driving waveform of the present invention. Figure 33 is a graph showing the relationship between the light-emitting rate and the brightness which are not modified according to the present invention. Figure 34 is an explanatory view of the viewfinder of the present invention. Figure 35 is an explanatory view showing a display state of the present invention. Figure 36 is a diagram illustrating the merging with the source signal.

圖37為亮燈率與耦合之關係圖。 圖38為輸入資料大幅晃動時之亮燈率之移動圖。 圖3 9為根據本發明 < Π墚對朿方法之說明圖。 圖40為特殊圖像模 、式時之電流轉移圖。 圖41為本發明之電 电池保濩之驅動圖。 圖42係由黑顯示轉 ^ 泛成白顯示時之電流量之關係圖。 圖43為本發明之 路構成圖。 圖44為本發明之一 孓颂不狀態之說明圖。 94992-961016.doc -99- 1295792 圖45(a)、(b)為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖46為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖47為N倍脈衝驅動之驅動波形圖。 圖48為N倍脈衝驅動之驅動波形圖。 圖49為低亮度部n倍脈衝驅動之說明圖。 圖5 0為本發明之驅動之說明圖。 圖5 1為低亮度部n倍脈衝驅動之說明圖。 圖52為本發明之攝影機之說明圖。 圖53為本發明之數位相機之說明圖。 圖54為本發明之電視(監視器)之說明圖。 圖55為亮燈率控制驅動之電路構成圖。 圖56為亮燈率控制驅動之時序圖。 圖5 7為亮燈率控制驅動之時序圖。 圖58為亮燈率延遲加法電路之電路構成圖。 圖59為延遲率及必要ψ貞數之曲線圖。 圖60為亮燈率微小控制驅動之電路構成圖。 圖61為亮燈率延遲加法電路之電路構成圖。 圖62為源極驅動器之構成圖。 圖63為源極驅動器之構成圖。 圖64係於低亮度部進行Ν倍脈衝驅動之驅動方法之電路 構成圖。 圖65係於低亮度部進行Ν倍脈衝驅動之驅動方法之電路 構成圖。 圖66為伽瑪曲線之說明。 94992-961016.doc -100- 1295792 圖67為伽瑪曲線之說明。 圖68為伽瑪曲線之電路構成圖。 圖69為發明之電路構成圖。 圖70為本發明所利用之暫存器之構成圖。 圖71為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖72係表示顯示狀態之圖。 圖73為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖74為本發明所利用之暫存器之構成圖。 圖75為本發明之時序圖。 圖76為本發明之像素構成圖。 圖77為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖78為本發明之時序圖。 圖79為本發明搭載面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖80為本發明搭載面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖81為本發明搭載面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖82為本發明之時序圖。 圖83為本發明之時序圖。 圖84為本發明之時序圖。 圖85為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖86為本發明之時序圖。 圖87為本發明之時序圖。 圖88為本發明之時序圖。 圖89為本發明搭载面板之顯示狀態之說明圖 圖90為像素構成之說明圖。 94992-961016.doc 1295792 圖91為有機EL元件之溫度與壽命之關係圖。 圖92係判斷本發明使用時之襞置狀態之資料及裝置之亮 燈率、流人信號線之電流之基準電流值之關係圖。 圖93係判斷本發明使用時之裝置狀態之資料及流入裝置 之電流量之關係圖。 圖94為本發明使用時之像素發光量之關係圖。 圖95為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖96為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖97為亮燈率與電流值之關係圖。 圖98為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖99為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖100為本發明搭載面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖101為本發明搭載面板之顯示狀態之說明圖。 圖102為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖103為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖104為裝置之溫度上升率之關係圖。 圖105為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖106為輸入資料與亮燈水平掃描線數之關係圖。 圖107為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖108為輸入資料與亮燈水平掃描線數之關係圖。 圖109為對於輸入資料之溫度上升之關係圖。 圖110為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖111為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖112為本發明之時間圖。 94992-961016.doc 1295792 圖113為本發明之時間圖。 圖114為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖115為本發明之時間圖。 圖116為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖117為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖118為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖119為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖120為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖121為本發明之電路構成圖。 鲁 圖122係表示資料之轉換器之轉換方法圖。 圖123為輸入資料與電流量之關係圖。 圖124為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖125為輸入資料與最大灰度數之關係圖。 圖126係表示伽瑪曲線之轉換。 圖127係將電流量之抑制與最大灰度數控制及亮燈率控 制共同進行之際之關係圖。 圖128為本發明之電路構成圖。 _ 圖129係表示本發明之資科轉換方法之圖。 圖130係輸入資料及顯示亮燈率或將其分類之圖。 圖131為本發明之電路構成圖。 圖132為本發明之顯示面板之像素構成圖。 圖133為本發明之顯示面板之像素構成圖。 圖134係表示亮燈率變化之延遲之圖。 【主要元件符號說明】 94992-961016.doc -103- 1295792 1卜 12 14 15 16、 17、 18 19 50 51 52 53 61 62 63 65 71 72 73 74 81 82 83 84 1331 電晶體(薄膜電晶體、TFT) 閘極驅動器(閘極驅動器1C電路) 源極驅動器(源極驅動器1C電路) EL元件(發光元件) 1336 像素 1337 閘極信號線 源極信號線 儲存電容(附加電容器、附加電容) 顯示晝面 寫入像素(寫入像素列) 非顯示像素(非顯示區域、非亮燈區域) 顯示像素(顯示區域、亮燈區域) 偏移暫存器 反相器(OEV信號線) 輸出緩衝器 OR電路 陣列基板(顯示面板) 雷射照射範圍(準分子雷射點) 定位打標機 玻璃基板(陣列基板) 控制1C(控制1C電路) 電源1C(電源1C電路) 印刷基板 可撓性基板 94992-961016.doc 1295792 85 密封蓋 86 陰極配線 87 陽極配線(Vdd) 88 資料信號線 89 閘極控制信號線 91 、 451 浮游電容 101 牆(肋部) 102 層間絕緣膜 104 接觸點連接部 105 像素電極 106 陰極電極 107 乾燥劑 108 λ /4板 109 偏光板 111 薄膜密封膜 271 假像素(假像素列) 341 接眼環 342 放大鏡 343 凸透鏡 452 電流源 481a 水平同步信號HD 482a、483a 閘極控制信號 521 支點(旋轉部) 522 攝影透鏡 94992-961016.doc -105- 1295792 523 收納部 524 開關 531 本體 532 攝影部 533 快門開關 541 安裝框 542 腳 543 安裝台 544 固定部 621 電阻 622 運算放大器 623 電晶體 624 電阻 625 電壓調節部 626 電源線 627 切換手段(開關) 628 控制資料 629 基準電流線 94992-961016.doc - 106-Figure 37 is a graph showing the relationship between lighting rate and coupling. Fig. 38 is a movement diagram of the lighting rate when the input data is greatly shaken. Figure 39 is an explanatory view of the < Π墚 Π墚 method according to the present invention. Figure 40 is a current transfer diagram for a special image mode. Figure 41 is a drive diagram of the battery protection of the present invention. Fig. 42 is a graph showing the relationship between the amount of current when the black display is turned into a white display. Figure 43 is a structural diagram of the road of the present invention. Figure 44 is an explanatory view showing one state of the present invention. 94992-961016.doc -99- 1295792 Figs. 45(a) and (b) are circuit diagrams of the present invention. Figure 46 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Fig. 47 is a driving waveform diagram of the N-fold pulse driving. Fig. 48 is a driving waveform diagram of the N-fold pulse driving. Fig. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing n-time pulse driving in the low luminance portion. Figure 50 is an explanatory view of the driving of the present invention. Fig. 51 is an explanatory diagram of n-time pulse driving in the low-luminance portion. Figure 52 is an explanatory view of a camera of the present invention. Figure 53 is an explanatory view of a digital camera of the present invention. Figure 54 is an explanatory view of a television (monitor) of the present invention. Fig. 55 is a circuit diagram showing the lighting rate control drive. Figure 56 is a timing diagram of the lighting rate control drive. Figure 5 7 is a timing diagram of the lighting rate control drive. Figure 58 is a circuit diagram showing the lighting rate delay adding circuit. Figure 59 is a graph of the delay rate and the necessary number of turns. Fig. 60 is a circuit diagram showing the lighting control rate of the light control rate. Fig. 61 is a circuit configuration diagram of a lighting rate delay adding circuit. Figure 62 is a block diagram of the source driver. Fig. 63 is a view showing the configuration of a source driver. Fig. 64 is a circuit diagram showing a driving method of driving a double pulse in a low luminance portion. Fig. 65 is a circuit diagram showing a driving method of driving a double pulse in a low luminance portion. Figure 66 is an illustration of a gamma curve. 94992-961016.doc -100- 1295792 Figure 67 is an illustration of the gamma curve. Fig. 68 is a circuit configuration diagram of a gamma curve. Figure 69 is a circuit diagram of the invention. Figure 70 is a block diagram showing the structure of a temporary memory used in the present invention. Figure 71 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Fig. 72 is a view showing a display state. Figure 73 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 74 is a block diagram showing the structure of a temporary memory used in the present invention. Figure 75 is a timing diagram of the present invention. Figure 76 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pixel of the present invention. Figure 77 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 78 is a timing diagram of the present invention. Fig. 79 is an explanatory view showing a display state of the mounting panel of the present invention. Fig. 80 is an explanatory view showing the display state of the mounting panel of the present invention. Fig. 81 is an explanatory view showing a display state of the mounting panel of the present invention. Figure 82 is a timing diagram of the present invention. Figure 83 is a timing diagram of the present invention. Figure 84 is a timing diagram of the present invention. Figure 85 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 86 is a timing diagram of the present invention. Figure 87 is a timing diagram of the present invention. Figure 88 is a timing diagram of the present invention. Fig. 89 is an explanatory view showing a display state of a mounting panel of the present invention. Fig. 90 is an explanatory view showing a pixel configuration. 94992-961016.doc 1295792 Figure 91 is a graph showing the relationship between temperature and lifetime of an organic EL device. Fig. 92 is a graph showing the relationship between the state of the device in use and the light rate of the device and the reference current value of the current of the flow signal line. Figure 93 is a graph showing the relationship between the state of the device at the time of use of the present invention and the amount of current flowing into the device. Figure 94 is a graph showing the relationship of the amount of luminescence of a pixel when used in the present invention. Figure 95 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 96 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 97 is a graph showing the relationship between the lighting rate and the current value. Figure 98 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 99 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Fig. 100 is an explanatory view showing a display state of a mounting panel of the present invention. Fig. 101 is an explanatory view showing a display state of a mounting panel of the present invention. Figure 102 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 103 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 104 is a graph showing the relationship between the temperature rise rate of the device. Figure 105 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 106 is a graph showing the relationship between the input data and the number of horizontal scanning lines. Figure 107 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 108 is a graph showing the relationship between the input data and the number of horizontal scanning lines. Figure 109 is a graph showing the relationship between the temperature rise of the input data. Figure 110 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 111 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 112 is a timing diagram of the present invention. 94992-961016.doc 1295792 Figure 113 is a timing diagram of the present invention. Figure 114 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 115 is a timing chart of the present invention. Figure 116 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 117 is a circuit configuration diagram of the present invention. Figure 118 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 119 is a circuit configuration diagram of the present invention. Figure 120 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 121 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Lutu 122 is a diagram showing a conversion method of a converter of data. Figure 123 is a graph showing the relationship between input data and current. Figure 124 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 125 is a plot of input data versus maximum gray level. Figure 126 is a diagram showing the conversion of a gamma curve. Fig. 127 is a diagram showing the relationship between the suppression of the amount of current and the control of the maximum gradation number and the control of the illumination rate. Figure 128 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 129 is a diagram showing the method of conversion of the subject matter of the present invention. Figure 130 is a diagram of input data and display of the lighting rate or classification thereof. Figure 131 is a circuit diagram of the present invention. Figure 132 is a diagram showing the pixel configuration of a display panel of the present invention. Figure 133 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pixel of a display panel of the present invention. Figure 134 is a graph showing the delay of the change in the lighting rate. [Description of main component symbols] 94992-961016.doc -103- 1295792 1Bu 12 14 15 16, 17, 18 19 50 51 52 53 61 62 63 65 71 72 73 74 81 82 83 84 1331 Transistor (thin film transistor, TFT) Gate driver (gate driver 1C circuit) Source driver (source driver 1C circuit) EL device (light-emitting device) 1336 Pixel 1337 Gate signal line source signal line storage capacitor (additional capacitor, additional capacitor) Display 昼Surface write pixel (write pixel column) Non-display pixel (non-display area, non-light area) Display pixel (display area, lighting area) Offset register inverter (OEV signal line) Output buffer OR Circuit array substrate (display panel) Laser irradiation range (excimer laser point) Positioning marking machine glass substrate (array substrate) Control 1C (control 1C circuit) Power supply 1C (power supply 1C circuit) Printed substrate flexible substrate 94992- 961016.doc 1295792 85 Sealing cap 86 Cathode wiring 87 Anode wiring (Vdd) 88 Data signal line 89 Gate control signal line 91, 451 Floating capacitor 101 Wall (rib) 102 Interlayer Insulating film 104 contact point connecting portion 105 pixel electrode 106 cathode electrode 107 desiccant 108 λ /4 plate 109 polarizing plate 111 thin film sealing film 271 dummy pixel (false pixel column) 341 eye ring 342 magnifier 343 convex lens 452 current source 481a horizontal synchronizing signal HD 482a, 483a Gate control signal 521 Pivot (rotating part) 522 Photographic lens 94092-961016.doc -105- 1295792 523 Storage part 524 Switch 531 Main body 532 Photographing section 533 Shutter switch 541 Mounting frame 542 Foot 543 Mounting table 544 Fixing part 621 Resistor 622 Operational Amplifier 623 Transistor 624 Resistor 625 Voltage Regulation 626 Power Line 627 Switching Mode (Switch) 628 Control Data 629 Reference Current Line 94092-961016.doc - 106-

Claims (1)

1295792 、申請專利範圍: f乂年f月%曰修(更)正本 +卜》电_ 一種自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其係藉由構成各像 素之複數自我發光70件在像素行方向及像素列方向配置 成矩陣狀’將電流流入前述各自我發光元件之陽極電極 與陰極電極間,以便使前述各像素發光,用以驅動顯示 部;且藉由: 第-處理,其係進行對應於自外部輸入之影像資料, 取得應流入前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之第一電流 量’且前述第-電流量不按照前述影像資料周邊之影像 資:值分佈狀況’而取得預先決定之單一值之處理者; 第二處理’其錢行對應於自外部輸人之前述影像資 料,取得應流入前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之第二 電机里’且W述第二電流量係按照前述影像資料周邊之 f述影像資料值分佈狀況,準備⑽以特定比例抑制前述 第-電流量之值’且前述抑制比例按照前述影像資料值 分佈狀況可變之處理者;及 t據前述第-或前述第二處理手段之結果,控制流入 各前述像素列之電流量,以便使前述顯示部發光。 2. 如請求们之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中自外部 輸入之前述影像資料之灰度值比第一特定灰度值於為了 進行黑顯示之低灰度側時,藉由前述第_處理,決定施 加於對應之前述各自我發光元件之前述陽極電極與前述 陰極電極間之前述第一電流量。 3. 如請求項1之自我|光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中自外部 94992-961016.doc 1295792 輸入之4述影像資料之灰度值比第一特定灰度值於為了 進仃白顯示之高灰度側時,藉由前述第二處理,決定施 加於對應之前述各自我發光元件之前述陽極電極與前述 陰極電極間之前述第二電流量X,此時,設對於前述灰度 值進订前述第一處理時之前述第一電流量為^時,於前述 第一電流量y與前述第二電流量X之間以下關係成立: 0.2〇yg 〇·6〇γ。 4·如Μ求項1至3中任一項之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方 法,其中前述施加電流量係藉由取得在第一期間自外部 輸入之則述影像資料之最大值之電流值i 1,由在第二期間 輸入之别述影像資料,藉由運算求出適當之電流值i2,根 據比例ι2Λ 1,依序算出施加於根據在前述第二期間輸入 之特定别述影像資料所顯示之前述各像素之電流量之處 理所決定。 5·如叫求項1至3中任一項之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方 套八中如述施加電流量係藉由取得輸入之前述影像資 料之最大值之第三電流值丨3,於前述各自我發光元件之前 述陽極電極及前述陰極電極間實際施加電流,求取最適 值,將該值作為前述第二電流值丨4,將比例丨4/丨3乘算於輸 入之前述影像資料,以便依序算出施加於根據特定前述 衫像資料所顯示之前述各像素之電流量所決定。 6·如明求項丨至3中任一項之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方 法其中自外部輸入之前述影像資料之灰度值比第一特 定灰度值於為了進行白顯示之高灰度側,以黑插入率控 94992-961016.doc 1295792 亲J施加於前述各自 極電極間之電流量。只件之前述陽極電極與前述陰 自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中前述黑 =係由苐一列依序進行至終端列,於”貞内一次插入黑 8. 9. 如請求項7之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中前述里 =係=前述第一列依序進行至前述終端列,於前述蹭 將則述黑區域分割成複數區域插入。 如請求項6之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中前述黑 插入不是於U貞内將黑區域分割成複數區域插入,並由第 一列至終㈣為止依序進行,而是―面更換順序一面插 入0 10 ·如請求項1至3 φ / ^ ^ 、 主3中任一項之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方 2 ’其中自彳部輸人之前述影像資料之灰度值比第-特 、又值於為了進行白顯示之高灰度側,施加於前述各 我發光元件之刚述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之電流 量係以調整流入源極線群之電流量而控制。 士明求項10之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中流入 月J述源極線群之前述電流量之前述調整係藉由增減基準 電流值而進行。 12.如請求項10之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中流入 丽述源極線群之前述電流量之前述調整係藉由增減灰度 數而進行。 13 ·如#求項1至3中任一項之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方 94992-961016.doc 1295792 法,其中取得於第一幀期間流入前述各自我發光元件之 前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之第一電流與於前述第 一幀期間其次之第二幀期間流入之前述第二電流之差 刀,運算使差分值為l/n(n為1以上之數)in差分電流值, 由前述η差分電流值決定像素列之選擇值。 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 如請求項13之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中前述^ 值為 4$ 256。 如請求項13中任一項之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方 法其藉由流入前述各自我發光元件之前述陽極電極與 前述陰極電極間之電流量,修正成7常數成為最佳。〃 如:求項15之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中前述 7常數為依序組合複數y曲線之中間值所構成之曲線上 之點集合。 如明求項15之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方法,其中前述 7 #數之增減係藉由前述自我發光元件之發光期間之長 短調整。 如請求項1至3中# -項之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動方 ^,其中配置對於前述第^處理手段之開關手段,控制 刖述第一處理之入切,以便於入時,以前述第一處理及 前述第二處理之組合’決定流人前述各自我發光元件之 前j陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之電流量,於切時,僅 以前述第一處理決定流入前述各自我發光元件之前述陽 極電極與前述陰極電極間之電流量。 一種自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電路,其係藉由構成各像 94992-961016.doc 1295792 素之複數自我發光元件在像素行方向及像素列方向配置 成矩陣狀,將電流流人前述各自我發光元件之陽極電極 與陰極電極間,以便使前述各像素發光,用以驅動顯示 部;且具備: 第-發光手段,其係以對應於自外部輸入之影像資料 而預先設定ϋ度’使前述各自我發光元件發光 者;及 第一發光手段,其係以配合周圍之前述各像素之發光 亮度分佈’以抑制對應於自外部輸人之前述影像資料而 預先設定之前述第-亮度<方式所調I之第二亮度,使 前述各自我發光元件發光者。 2〇· —種自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電路,其係藉由構成各像 素之複數自㈣光元件在像素行方向及像素列方向配置 成矩陣狀,將電流流入前述各自我發光元件之陽極電極 與陰極電極間,以便使前述各像素發光,用以驅動顯示 部;且具備: 第一處理手段,其係進行對應於自外部輸入之影像資 料,設定應流入前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間之第一 電流量,且前述第一電流量不按照前述影像資料周邊之 影像資料值分佈狀況,而設定預先決定之單一值之處理 者; 第二處理手段,其係進行對應於自外部輸入之前述影 像^料’而设定應流入前述陽極電極與前述陰極電極間 之第二電流量,且前述第二電流量係按照前述影像資料 94992-961016.doc 1295792 周邊之前述影像資料值分佈狀 制前述第一電流量之值,且前 資料值分佈狀況可變之處理者 ;兄,準備1個以特定比例抑 述抑制比例按照前述影像 ,·及 抚制手段其係根據前述第—及 έ士婁缺座丨、古々二 及别述弟二處理手段之 、、、口果,技制&入各别述像素列之電流量者。 21.如請求項20之自我發光顯示H κ踞勁電路,其中前述 第二處理電路係進行以自外 ^ 礎,蕤由,軍瞀♦田 ρ輪入之别述影像資料為基 礎藉由運异處理,決定久禮本χ, 象素列之則述第二電流量之 處理。 22.如請求項21之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電路,其中前述 運异處理係取得在第—期間自外部輸人之前述影像資料 之最大值之電流值u’由在第二期間輸人之前述影像資 料,藉由運算求出適當之電流值12,根據比例腕,依序 算出施加於根據在前述第二期間輸入之特定前述影像資 料所顯不之前述各像素之電流量之處理。 23· ^請求項2〇之自我發光顯示聚置之驅動電路,其中前述 第-處理電路具有測定自外部輸人之前述影像資料之手 段進4丁以則述測定結果為&冑,決定各像素列之前述 第二電流量之運算處理。 24.如明求項23之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電路,其中前述 運算處理係藉由取得自外部輸人之前述影像資料之最大 值之第二電流值l3,於前述各自我發光元件之前述陽極電 極與前述陰極電極間實際施加電流,求取最適值,將該 值作為第一電流值i4,將比例i4W乘算於輸入之前述影像 94992-961016.doc 1295792 貝枓=便依序算出施加於根據特定前述影像資料所顯 不之刖述各像素之電流量之處理。 25·^求項19至24中任一項之自我發光顯示裝置之驅動電 ,其中具備為了僅以前述第-處理手段動作之對於前 述第二處理手段之開關手段。 對於别 26’ϋ自我發光顯示裝置之控制器,其係具有請求物至 24中任一項之驅動電路。 27·—種自我發光顯示裝置’其係具有w中任一 項之驅動電路,曰^Ρ、+,A , 34自我t光元件在前述像素行方向 及則述像素列方向形成或配置成矩陣狀。 素:顯不裝置之驅動方法,其係藉由構成各像 成t自我發光元件在像素行方向及像相方向配置 將電流流入前述各自我發光元件之陽極電極 部:電極間’以便使前述各像素發光,用以驅動顯示 ::據弟-或第二處理手段之結果,控制流入各前述像 t列之電流量,錢使前述顯示部發光;前㈣ =對應於自外部輸入之影像資料,取得應流入前述 Π與前述陰極電極間之第-電流量,且前述第- 彡像資料周邊之影像f料 :進::得預先決定之單-值之處理者;前述第二處理, 應於自外部輸入之前述影像資料,取得應流入 之1¼極電極與前述险★雷 第二電流量係按照前述影像資二-電流里’且前述 4豕貝枓周邊之前述影像資料值 94992-961016.doc 1295792 分佈狀況,準備1個以特定比例抑制前述第一電流量之 值,且前述抑制比例按照前述影像資料值分佈狀況可變 之處理者;且 在將相當於進行白顯示之前述電流量以100予以表現 之情況,對於前述特定電流量係以30以下予以表現的低 電流區域之灰度,若將Nl> 1,N2>0且N1-N2之正數設 定為係數,將前述特定電流量設定為W,將此時的電流值 設定為Iorg,將發光期間設定為Torg,則取代前述電流量 而施加滿足電流值為IorgxNl且發光期間為Torgxl/N2之 電流量。 94992-961016.doc 1295792 第093123557號專利申請案 中文圖式替換頁(96年10月)1295792, the scope of patent application: f乂year f month%曰修(more)本本+卜》电_ A method of driving a self-luminous display device, which is composed of a plurality of self-illuminating 70 pixels in the pixel row direction The pixel column direction is arranged in a matrix shape to flow a current between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the respective light-emitting elements, so that the respective pixels emit light for driving the display portion; and: by the first processing, the system corresponds to Obtaining a predetermined single amount from the externally input image data to obtain a first current amount ' flowing between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode and the first current amount is not in accordance with the image resource: value distribution state around the image data The processor of the value; the second process 'the money line corresponds to the image data from the external input, and the second motor is to be flown into the second motor between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode' and the second current quantity is Preparing (10) suppressing the value of the first current amount by a specific ratio in the distribution of the image data values around the image data, and the foregoing The suppression ratio is determined by the processor having the variable distribution of the image data values; and t controlling the amount of current flowing into each of the pixel columns in accordance with the result of the second or the second processing means to cause the display portion to emit light. 2. The driving method of the self-luminous display device of the requester, wherein the gray value of the image data input from the outside is smaller than the first specific gray value on the low gray side for black display, by the foregoing The treatment determines the first current amount applied between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the corresponding respective light-emitting elements. 3. The driving method of the self-light display device of claim 1, wherein the gray value of the image data input from the external 94992-961016.doc 1295792 is higher than the first specific gray value in order to display the white display On the gradation side, the second current amount X applied between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the corresponding respective light-emitting elements is determined by the second processing, and at this time, the gradation value is set for the gray value. When the first current amount in the first processing is ^, the relationship between the first current amount y and the second current amount X is established as follows: 0.2 〇 yg 〇 · 6 〇 γ. The driving method of the self-luminous display device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the amount of applied current is obtained by obtaining a current value i of a maximum value of the image data input from the outside during the first period. 1. The image data obtained by the second period is calculated by calculating an appropriate current value i2, and the ratio is calculated according to the ratio ι2 Λ 1, and sequentially applied to the specific image data input according to the second period input. The processing of the current amount of each of the above pixels is determined. 5. The driving current set of the self-luminous display device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the applied current amount is obtained by obtaining a third current value 丨3 of the maximum value of the input image data, An actual current is actually applied between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of each of the light-emitting elements, and an optimum value is obtained. The value is used as the second current value 丨4, and the ratio 丨4/丨3 is multiplied to the input image data. In order to sequentially calculate the amount of current applied to each of the aforementioned pixels displayed according to the specific pattern data. The driving method of the self-luminous display device according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the grayscale value of the image data input from the outside is higher than the first specific grayscale value on the high grayscale side for white display The amount of current applied between the respective electrode electrodes is controlled by black insertion rate 94092-961016.doc 1295792. A method for driving the anode electrode and the cathode self-luminous display device described above, wherein the black= is sequentially carried out from the column to the terminal column, and the black is inserted once in the “8. 9. Self-luminescence as in claim 7 The driving method of the display device, wherein the first row = the first column sequentially proceeds to the terminal column, and the black region is divided into a plurality of regions to be inserted in the foregoing. The driving method of the self-luminous display device of claim 6 , wherein the black insertion is not to divide the black area into a plurality of area insertions in the U ,, and is sequentially performed from the first column to the last (four), but the side replacement order is inserted 0 0 · as in the request items 1 to 3 φ / ^ ^, the driving side of the self-illuminating display device of any one of the main 3'', wherein the gray value of the aforementioned image data input from the 彳 part is higher than the first-order, and is higher than the high-gradation for white display. On the side, the amount of current applied between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode applied to each of the light-emitting elements described above is controlled by adjusting the amount of current flowing into the source line group. The driving method, wherein the adjustment of the current amount flowing into the source line group of the month is performed by increasing or decreasing the reference current value. 12. The driving method of the self-luminous display device of claim 10, wherein the inflow is described The aforementioned adjustment of the amount of current of the source line group is performed by increasing or decreasing the number of gradations. 13 · The driving method of the self-luminous display device according to any one of items 1 to 3 is 94992-961016.doc 1295792 And obtaining a difference knife between the first current flowing between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the respective light-emitting elements during the first frame period and the second current flowing during the second frame period of the first frame period; The operation is such that the difference value is l/n (n is a number of 1 or more) in the differential current value, and the selected value of the pixel column is determined by the η differential current value. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. The driving method of the self-luminous display device, wherein the aforementioned value is 4$ 256. The driving method of the self-luminous display device according to any one of claim 13 is characterized in that the anode electrode flows into the aforementioned respective light-emitting elements and the foregoing The amount of current between the cathode electrodes is corrected to a constant of 7 constants. For example, the driving method of the self-luminous display device of claim 15, wherein the 7 constants are on the curve formed by sequentially combining the intermediate values of the complex y curves. The method of driving a self-luminous display device according to claim 15, wherein the increase or decrease of the 7 # number is adjusted by the length of the light-emitting period of the self-luminous element. As in the claims 1 to 3, the #-item a driving means of the self-luminous display device, wherein the switching means for the foregoing processing means is arranged, and the switching of the first processing is controlled to facilitate the timing of the combination of the first processing and the second processing The amount of current flowing between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode before the respective light-emitting elements of the current source is determined by the first process to determine the amount of current flowing between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode of the respective light-emitting elements. A driving circuit for a self-luminous display device, which is arranged in a matrix in a pixel row direction and a pixel column direction by a plurality of self-luminous elements constituting each image 94092-961016.doc 1295792, and current flows to the respective light-emitting elements Between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode, so that the respective pixels emit light for driving the display portion; and: a first-light-emitting means for pre-setting the degree of the image corresponding to the image data input from the outside to make the respective a light-emitting element illuminator; and a first illuminating means for adjusting the illuminance brightness distribution of each of the surrounding pixels to suppress the aforementioned first-brightness <RTIgt; The second brightness of I causes the aforementioned respective light-emitting elements to emit light. 2. A driving circuit for a self-luminous display device in which a plurality of (four) optical elements constituting each pixel are arranged in a matrix in a pixel row direction and a pixel column direction, and a current is supplied to an anode electrode of each of the respective light-emitting elements. And a cathode electrode for causing each of the pixels to emit light for driving the display portion; and: a first processing means for performing image data corresponding to the external input, and setting between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode a first current amount, and the first current amount is not a processor that sets a predetermined single value according to a distribution of image data values surrounding the image data; and the second processing means performs the foregoing corresponding to the external input The image material is set to flow into the second current amount between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode, and the second current amount is formed according to the distribution of the image data values around the image data 94092-961016.doc 1295792. The value of the first current amount, and the distribution of the previous data value is variable; brother, prepare one special The proportional ratio suppression ratio according to the above-mentioned image, and the means of treatment are based on the above-mentioned first and the gentleman's lack of seat, the ancient two and the other two methods, the word, the technical system & The amount of current into each pixel column. 21. The self-illuminating display H 踞 踞 电路 circuit of claim 20, wherein the second processing circuit is based on external image data, and is based on image data of the military 瞀 田 ρ The different processing determines the long-term ritual, and the pixel column describes the processing of the second current amount. 22. The driving circuit of the self-luminous display device of claim 21, wherein the transfer processing is to obtain a current value u' of a maximum value of the image data input from the outside during the first period by the second period. The image data is calculated by calculating an appropriate current value 12, and based on the proportional wrist, sequentially processes the amount of current applied to each of the pixels displayed by the specific image data input during the second period. 23· ^ The driving circuit of the self-luminous display of the request item 2, wherein the first processing circuit has a means for measuring the image data input from the outside, and the measurement result is & The arithmetic processing of the aforementioned second current amount of the pixel column. 24. The driving circuit of the self-luminous display device according to claim 23, wherein the operation processing is performed by using the second current value l3 of the maximum value of the image data from the external input, in the foregoing An actual current is applied between the anode electrode and the cathode electrode to obtain an optimum value. The value is used as the first current value i4, and the ratio i4W is multiplied to the input image 94992-961016.doc 1295792. The processing of the current amount of each pixel is not described based on the specific image data. The driving power of the self-luminous display device according to any one of the items 19 to 24, wherein the driving means for the second processing means for operating only by the first processing means is provided. For the controller of the 26' self-luminous display device, it has the drive circuit of any one of the claims to 24. 27. A self-luminous display device having a driving circuit of any one of w, wherein the self-t-light elements are formed or arranged in a matrix in the pixel row direction and the pixel column direction. shape. The driving method of the display device is characterized in that a current is supplied to the anode electrode portion of the respective light-emitting elements: between the electrodes in the pixel row direction and the image phase direction by forming the self-light-emitting elements of the respective images, so that the foregoing Pixel illumination for driving the display: controlling the amount of current flowing into each of the aforementioned image t columns as a result of the second- or second processing means, the money causing the display portion to emit light; the front (four) = corresponding to the image data input from the outside, Obtaining a first current amount that should flow between the Π and the cathode electrode, and the image of the periphery of the first 彡 image data: a predetermined one-valued processor; the second processing From the externally input image data, the 11⁄4 pole electrode that should be flowed in and the above-mentioned danger ★ Ray second current quantity are according to the aforementioned image 2 - current and the aforementioned image data value of 9492-961016. Doc 1295792 distribution status, preparing a value that suppresses the value of the first current amount by a specific ratio, and the aforementioned suppression ratio is variable according to the distribution of the image data value; and When the current amount corresponding to the white display is expressed by 100, the gradation of the low current region expressed by 30 or less for the specific current amount is a positive number of N1 > 1, N2 > 0 and N1 - N2. The coefficient is set to W, the specific current amount is set to W, the current value at this time is set to Iorg, and the light-emitting period is set to Torg, and the current value is IorgxN1 and the light-emitting period is Torgxl/N2 instead of the current amount. Electricity flow. 94992-961016.doc 1295792 Patent Application No. 093123557 Chinese Graphic Replacement Page (October 1996) 94992-fig-961016.doc 1295792 > 〇93123557號專利申請案知條⑼i替換頁 中文圖式替換頁(96年10月)/ · 一 函33 S Ο 亮度(%) 〇94992-fig-961016.doc 1295792 > 〇93123557 Patent Application Known Article (9) i Replacement Page Chinese Graphic Replacement Page (October 96) / · A Letter 33 S 亮度 Brightness (%) 〇 94992-fig-961016.doc •33- 〇93123557號專利申請案 中文圖式替換頁(96年10月) 月%日修U替換頁94992-fig-961016.doc •33- 〇93123557 Patent Application Chinese Graphic Replacement Page (October 96) Month % Daily Repair U Replacement Page 94992-fig-961016.doc •94- 1295792 第093123557號專利申請案 中文圖式替換頁(96年1〇月) 麵101 漸藤关卡莓鈦雞犛100(0/。)94992-fig-961016.doc •94- 1295792 Patent application No. 093123557 Chinese pattern replacement page (96 years 1 month) No. 101 Vaseng level card raspberry titanium chicken 100 (0/.) 94992-fig-9610l6.doc 1295792 第093123557號專利申請案 中文圖式替換頁(96年1〇月)94992-fig-9610l6.doc 1295792 Patent application No. 093123557 Chinese picture replacement page (96 years 1 month) 105 S54105 S54 -105- 94992-fig_961016.doc X 1295792 第093123557號專利申請案 中文圖式替換頁(96年10月) 〇 函一25 鄴 Asm%)-105- 94992-fig_961016.doc X 1295792 Patent Application No. 093123557 Chinese Graphic Replacement Page (October 1996) 〇 Letter 1 25 邺 Asm%) 94992-fig-9610I6.doc -125- 1295792 第093123557號專利申請案 中文圖式替換頁(96年10月) 戶钤:费Ί替换頁94992-fig-9610I6.doc -125- 1295792 Patent Application No. 093123557 Chinese Pattern Replacement Page (October 96) Totsuka: Feiyin Replacement Page 94992-fig-961016.doc 127- 1295792 七、指定代表圖: (一) 本案指定代表圖為:第(1 )圖。 (二) 本代表圖之元件符號簡單說明: 11a〜lid 電晶體(薄膜電晶體、TFT) 12 閘極驅動器(閘極驅動器IC電路) 14 源極驅動器(源極驅動器1C電路) 15 EL元件(發光元件) 16 像素 17a、17b 閘極信號線 18 源極信號線 19 儲存電容(附加電容器、附加電容) G 閘極 S 源極 D 汲極 Vdd 電流供給線 八、本案若有化學式時,請揭示最能顯示發明特徵的化學式: (無) 94992-961016.doc94992-fig-961016.doc 127- 1295792 VII. Designated representative map: (1) The representative representative of the case is: (1). (2) A brief description of the component symbols of this representative diagram: 11a~lid transistor (thin film transistor, TFT) 12 gate driver (gate driver IC circuit) 14 source driver (source driver 1C circuit) 15 EL component ( Light-emitting device) 16 pixels 17a, 17b Gate signal line 18 Source signal line 19 Storage capacitor (additional capacitor, additional capacitor) G Gate S Source D Dip Vdd Current supply line 8. If there is a chemical formula in this case, please disclose The chemical formula that best shows the characteristics of the invention: (none) 94992-961016.doc
TW093123557A 2003-08-05 2004-08-05 Driving method and circuits of self-luminous display device TW200506785A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2003287214 2003-08-05
JP2003292600A JP2005062485A (en) 2003-08-12 2003-08-12 Organic el display device and its driving method
JP2003359848A JP2005122070A (en) 2003-10-20 2003-10-20 Organic el display device and its driving method
JP2003412928A JP2005173193A (en) 2003-12-11 2003-12-11 Organic el display device and method for driving the same
JP2003432681A JP2005189636A (en) 2003-12-26 2003-12-26 Driving method and driving circuit of display device
JP2004017653 2004-01-26

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW200506785A TW200506785A (en) 2005-02-16
TWI295792B true TWI295792B (en) 2008-04-11

Family

ID=45068544

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW093123557A TW200506785A (en) 2003-08-05 2004-08-05 Driving method and circuits of self-luminous display device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW200506785A (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102468518A (en) * 2010-11-17 2012-05-23 英业达股份有限公司 Battery module and electronic device applying same
TWI408817B (en) * 2009-05-13 2013-09-11

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101348753B1 (en) * 2005-06-10 2014-01-07 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display device and driving method thereof
TWI466079B (en) * 2013-01-08 2014-12-21 Univ Nat Yunlin Sci & Tech Apparatus and method for adjusting color temperature of led light system
CN112435637B (en) * 2020-11-30 2022-03-18 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Brightness compensation method, brightness compensation equipment and brightness compensation system of curved screen

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI408817B (en) * 2009-05-13 2013-09-11
CN102468518A (en) * 2010-11-17 2012-05-23 英业达股份有限公司 Battery module and electronic device applying same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW200506785A (en) 2005-02-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI363327B (en) El display device and the method for driving the same
US7592981B2 (en) Circuit for driving self-luminous display device and method for driving the same
JP2004093682A (en) Electroluminescence display panel, driving method of electroluminescence display panel, driving circuit of electroluminescence display apparatus and electroluminescence display apparatus
JP2003150104A (en) Method for driving el display device, and el display device and information display device
JP2003216100A (en) El (electroluminescent) display panel and el display device and its driving method and method for inspecting the same device and driver circuit for the same device
JP2003150109A (en) Method for driving el display device and el display device and its manufacturing method, and information display device
JP2006276718A (en) El display apparatus
JP2005062485A (en) Organic el display device and its driving method
TWI295792B (en)
JP2006276713A (en) Power supply circuit for el display apparatus
JP2007108264A (en) El display device
JP2009151315A (en) El display device
JP2005173193A (en) Organic el display device and method for driving the same
JP2006053236A (en) Driving method
JP2005122070A (en) Organic el display device and its driving method
JP2005189636A (en) Driving method and driving circuit of display device
KR100865603B1 (en) El display device
JP2006301298A (en) Driving method and circuit configuration of display device
JP2005140934A (en) El display device